ZyXEL Communications VMG1312B10C Wireless N VDSL2 4-ports Gateway with USB Wireless N VDSL2 4-ports Gateway without USB User Manual

ZyXEL Communications Corporation Wireless N VDSL2 4-ports Gateway with USB Wireless N VDSL2 4-ports Gateway without USB

User manual

Quick Start Guidewww.zyxel.comVMG1 3 1 2 - B1 0 CWireless N VDSL2 4-port Gateway with USBVersion 1.00Edition 1, 10/2014Copyright © 2014 ZyXEL Communications CorporationUser’s GuideDefault Login Deta ilsLAN IP Address http://192.168.1.1Login adminPassword 1234
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide2IMPORTANT!READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USE.KEEP THIS GUIDE FOR FUTURE REFERENCE.Screenshots and graphics in this book may differ slightly from your product due to differences in your product firmware or your computer operating system. Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this manual is accurate.Related Documentation•Quick Start Guide The Quick Start Guide shows how to connect the Device and get up and running right away.
Contents OverviewVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 3Contents OverviewUser’s Guide .......................................................................................................................................15Introducing the Device ............................................................................................................................17The Web Configurator .............................................................................................................................23Quick Start ...............................................................................................................................................31Technical Reference ..........................................................................................................................33Network Map and Status Screens ...........................................................................................................35Broadband ...............................................................................................................................................39Wireless ..................................................................................................................................................65Home Networking ..................................................................................................................................101Routing ..................................................................................................................................................125Quality of Service (QoS) .......................................................................................................................131Network Address Translation (NAT) ......................................................................................................149Dynamic DNS Setup .............................................................................................................................167Interface Group .....................................................................................................................................171USB Service ..........................................................................................................................................177Firewall ..................................................................................................................................................183MAC Filter .............................................................................................................................................193Parental Control ....................................................................................................................................195Scheduler Rule ......................................................................................................................................199Certificates ............................................................................................................................................201VPN .......................................................................................................................................................209Log .......................................................................................................................................................221Traffic Status ........................................................................................................................................225ARP Table .............................................................................................................................................229Routing Table ........................................................................................................................................231IGMP Status .........................................................................................................................................233xDSL Statistics ......................................................................................................................................2353G Statistics .........................................................................................................................................239User Account .........................................................................................................................................241Remote Management ............................................................................................................................243TR-069 Client ........................................................................................................................................245TR-064 ..................................................................................................................................................247Time Settings ........................................................................................................................................249E-mail Notification .................................................................................................................................253Logs Setting .........................................................................................................................................255Firmware Upgrade ................................................................................................................................259Configuration .........................................................................................................................................261
Contents OverviewVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide4Diagnostic .............................................................................................................................................265Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................................................271
Table of ContentsVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 5Table of ContentsContents Overview ..............................................................................................................................3Table of Contents .................................................................................................................................5Part I: User’s Guide ......................................................................................... 15Chapter 1Introducing the Device .......................................................................................................................171.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................171.2 Ways to Manage the Device .............................................................................................................171.3 Good Habits for Managing the Device ..............................................................................................171.4 Applications for the Device ...............................................................................................................181.4.1 Internet Access ........................................................................................................................181.4.2 Device’s USB Support .............................................................................................................191.5 LEDs (Lights) ....................................................................................................................................201.6 The RESET Button ............................................................................................................................201.7 Wireless Access ................................................................................................................................211.7.1 Using the WLAN/WPS Button .................................................................................................21Chapter 2The Web Configurator ........................................................................................................................232.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................232.1.1 Accessing the Web Configurator .............................................................................................232.2 Web Configurator Layout ..................................................................................................................252.2.1 Title Bar ...................................................................................................................................252.2.2 Main Window ...........................................................................................................................262.2.3 Navigation Panel .....................................................................................................................27Chapter 3Quick Start...........................................................................................................................................313.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................313.2 Quick Start Setup ..............................................................................................................................31Part II: Technical Reference............................................................................ 33Chapter 4Network Map and Status Screens .....................................................................................................35
Table of ContentsVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide64.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................354.2 The Network Map Screen .................................................................................................................354.3 The Status Screen .............................................................................................................................36Chapter 5Broadband...........................................................................................................................................395.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................395.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ............................................................................................395.1.2 What You Need to Know ..........................................................................................................405.1.3 Before You Begin .....................................................................................................................425.2 The Broadband Screen .....................................................................................................................425.2.1 Add/Edit Internet Connection ...................................................................................................445.3 The 3G Backup Screen .....................................................................................................................515.4 The Advanced Screen .......................................................................................................................555.5 The 8021x Screen .............................................................................................................................565.5.1 Edit 802.1X Settings ................................................................................................................575.6 The Ethernet WAN Screen ................................................................................................................575.7 Technical Reference ..........................................................................................................................58Chapter 6Wireless ...............................................................................................................................................656.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................656.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ............................................................................................656.1.2 What You Need to Know ..........................................................................................................666.2 The General Screen .........................................................................................................................666.2.1 No Security ..............................................................................................................................696.2.2 Basic (WEP Encryption) ..........................................................................................................706.2.3 Basic (802.1X) .........................................................................................................................716.2.4 More Secure (WPA(2)-PSK) ....................................................................................................736.2.5 WPA(2) Authentication .............................................................................................................746.3 The More AP Screen .........................................................................................................................756.3.1 Edit More AP ..........................................................................................................................776.4 MAC Authentication ..........................................................................................................................786.5 The WPS Screen ..............................................................................................................................796.6 The WMM Screen .............................................................................................................................816.7 The WDS Screen ..............................................................................................................................826.7.1 WDS Scan ...............................................................................................................................836.8 The Others Screen ............................................................................................................................846.9 The Channel Status Screen ..............................................................................................................866.10 Technical Reference ........................................................................................................................866.10.1 Wireless Network Overview ...................................................................................................866.10.2 Additional Wireless Terms .....................................................................................................886.10.3 Wireless Security Overview ...................................................................................................88
Table of ContentsVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 76.10.4 Signal Problems ....................................................................................................................916.10.5 BSS .......................................................................................................................................916.10.6 MBSSID .................................................................................................................................916.10.7 Preamble Type ......................................................................................................................926.10.8 Wireless Distribution System (WDS) .....................................................................................926.10.9 WiFi Protected Setup (WPS) .................................................................................................93Chapter 7Home Networking .............................................................................................................................1017.1 Overview .........................................................................................................................................1017.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ..........................................................................................1017.1.2 What You Need To Know .......................................................................................................1027.1.3 Before You Begin ...................................................................................................................1037.2 The LAN Setup Screen ...................................................................................................................1037.3 The Static DHCP Screen .................................................................................................................1077.4 The UPnP Screen ...........................................................................................................................1087.5 Installing UPnP in Windows Example .............................................................................................1097.6 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example ............................................................................................ 1127.7 The Additional Subnet Screen ........................................................................................................ 1187.8 The STB Vendor ID Screen ............................................................................................................. 1197.9 The LAN VLAN Screen ...................................................................................................................1207.10 Technical Reference ......................................................................................................................1207.10.1 LANs, WANs and the Device ...............................................................................................1217.10.2 DHCP Setup ........................................................................................................................1217.10.3 DNS Server Addresses .......................................................................................................1217.10.4 LAN TCP/IP .........................................................................................................................122Chapter 8Routing ..............................................................................................................................................1258.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................1258.2 The Routing Screen ........................................................................................................................1268.2.1 Add/Edit Static Route .............................................................................................................1278.3 The Policy Forwarding Screen ........................................................................................................1278.3.1 Add/Edit Policy Forwarding ...................................................................................................1298.4 RIP ..............................................................................................................................................1298.4.1 The RIP Screen .....................................................................................................................130Chapter 9Quality of Service (QoS)...................................................................................................................1319.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................1319.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ..........................................................................................1319.2 What You Need to Know .................................................................................................................1329.3 The Quality of Service General Screen ..........................................................................................133
Table of ContentsVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide89.4 The Queue Setup Screen ...............................................................................................................1349.4.1 Adding a QoS Queue ...........................................................................................................1369.5 The Class Setup Screen .................................................................................................................1369.5.1 Add/Edit QoS Class ..............................................................................................................1389.6 The QoS Policer Setup Screen .......................................................................................................1419.6.1 Add/Edit a QoS Policer .........................................................................................................1429.7 The QoS Monitor Screen ...............................................................................................................1439.8 Technical Reference ........................................................................................................................144Chapter 10Network Address Translation (NAT)................................................................................................14910.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................14910.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................14910.1.2 What You Need To Know .....................................................................................................14910.2 The Port Forwarding Screen ........................................................................................................15010.2.1 Add/Edit Port Forwarding ...................................................................................................15210.3 The Applications Screen ...............................................................................................................15310.3.1 Add New Application ...........................................................................................................15410.4 The Port Triggering Screen ...........................................................................................................15510.4.1 Add/Edit Port Triggering Rule .............................................................................................15710.5 The DMZ Screen ...........................................................................................................................15810.6 The ALG Screen ...........................................................................................................................15810.7 The Address Mapping Screen .......................................................................................................15910.7.1 Add/Edit Address Mapping Rule ..........................................................................................16010.8 Technical Reference ......................................................................................................................16110.8.1 NAT Definitions ....................................................................................................................16110.8.2 What NAT Does ...................................................................................................................16210.8.3 How NAT Works ..................................................................................................................16310.8.4 NAT Application ...................................................................................................................164Chapter 11Dynamic DNS Setup .........................................................................................................................16711.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................16711.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................16711.1.2 What You Need To Know .....................................................................................................16811.2 The DNS Entry Screen ..................................................................................................................16811.2.1 Add/Edit DNS Entry .............................................................................................................16911.3 The Dynamic DNS Screen ............................................................................................................169Chapter 12Interface Group .................................................................................................................................17112.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................17112.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................171
Table of ContentsVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 912.2 The Interface Group Screen ..........................................................................................................17112.2.1 Interface Group Configuration .............................................................................................17212.2.2 Interface Grouping Criteria .................................................................................................174Chapter 13USB Service ......................................................................................................................................17713.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................17713.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................17713.1.2 What You Need To Know .....................................................................................................17713.2 The File Sharing Screen ...............................................................................................................17813.2.1 Before You Begin .................................................................................................................17913.3 The Media Server Screen .............................................................................................................18013.4 The Printer Server Screen ............................................................................................................18113.4.1 Before You Begin .................................................................................................................181Chapter 14Firewall ..............................................................................................................................................18314.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................18314.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................18314.1.2 What You Need to Know ......................................................................................................18414.2 The Firewall Screen ......................................................................................................................18514.3 The Service Screen ......................................................................................................................18514.3.1 Add/Edit a Service ..............................................................................................................18714.4 The Access Control Screen ..........................................................................................................18814.4.1 Add/Edit an ACL Rule ........................................................................................................18914.5 The DoS Screen ............................................................................................................................190Chapter 15MAC Filter..........................................................................................................................................19315.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................19315.2 The MAC Filter Screen ..................................................................................................................193Chapter 16Parental Control................................................................................................................................19516.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................19516.2 The Parental Control Screen .........................................................................................................19516.2.1 Add/Edit a Parental Control Rule .........................................................................................196Chapter 17Scheduler Rule..................................................................................................................................19917.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................19917.2 The Scheduler Rule Screen ..........................................................................................................19917.2.1 Add/Edit a Schedule ............................................................................................................200
Table of ContentsVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide10Chapter 18Certificates ........................................................................................................................................20118.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................20118.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................20118.2 What You Need to Know ...............................................................................................................20118.3 The Local Certificates Screen .......................................................................................................20218.3.1 Create Certificate Request .................................................................................................20318.3.2 Load Signed Certificate ......................................................................................................20418.4 The Trusted CA Screen ................................................................................................................20518.4.1 View Trusted CA Certificate .................................................................................................20618.4.2 Import Trusted CA Certificate ..............................................................................................207Chapter 19VPN ....................................................................................................................................................20919.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................20919.2 IPSec VPN ....................................................................................................................................20919.2.1 The General Screen ............................................................................................................20919.2.2 IPSec VPN: Add ..................................................................................................................21019.3 Technical Reference ......................................................................................................................21519.3.1 IPSec Architecture ...............................................................................................................21519.3.2 Encapsulation ......................................................................................................................21619.3.3 IKE Phases .........................................................................................................................21719.3.4 Negotiation Mode ................................................................................................................21819.3.5 IPSec and NAT ....................................................................................................................21819.3.6 VPN, NAT, and NAT Traversal .............................................................................................21919.3.7 Pre-Shared Key ...................................................................................................................21919.3.8 Diffie-Hellman (DH) Key Groups ..........................................................................................220Chapter 20Log ....................................................................................................................................................22120.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................22120.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................22120.1.2 What You Need To Know .....................................................................................................22120.2 The System Log Screen ................................................................................................................22220.3 The Security Log Screen ...............................................................................................................223Chapter 21Traffic Status ....................................................................................................................................22521.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................22521.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................22521.2 The WAN Status Screen ...............................................................................................................22521.3 The LAN Status Screen .................................................................................................................22721.4 The NAT Status Screen .................................................................................................................228
Table of ContentsVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 11Chapter 22ARP Table ..........................................................................................................................................22922.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................22922.1.1 How ARP Works ..................................................................................................................22922.2 ARP Table Screen .........................................................................................................................229Chapter 23Routing Table ....................................................................................................................................23123.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................23123.2 The Routing Table Screen .............................................................................................................231Chapter 24IGMP Status ......................................................................................................................................23324.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................23324.2 The IGMP Group Status Screen ...................................................................................................233Chapter 25xDSL Statistics..................................................................................................................................23525.1 The xDSL Statistics Screen ...........................................................................................................235Chapter 263G Statistics .....................................................................................................................................23926.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................23926.2 The 3G Statistics Screen ...............................................................................................................239Chapter 27User Account ....................................................................................................................................24127.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................24127.2 The User Account Screen .............................................................................................................241Chapter 28Remote Management........................................................................................................................24328.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................24328.2 The Remote MGMT Screen ..........................................................................................................243Chapter 29TR-069 Client.....................................................................................................................................24529.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................24529.2 The TR-069 Client Screen ............................................................................................................245Chapter 30TR-064................................................................................................................................................24730.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................247
Table of ContentsVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide1230.2 The TR-064 Screen .......................................................................................................................247Chapter 31Time Settings ....................................................................................................................................24931.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................24931.2 The Time Screen ..........................................................................................................................249Chapter 32E-mail Notification ............................................................................................................................25332.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................25332.2 The Email Notification Screen .......................................................................................................25332.2.1 Email Notification Edit ........................................................................................................254Chapter 33Logs Setting .....................................................................................................................................25533.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................25533.2 The Log Settings Screen ...............................................................................................................25633.2.1 Example E-mail Log ............................................................................................................257Chapter 34Firmware Upgrade ............................................................................................................................25934.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................25934.2 The Firmware Screen ....................................................................................................................259Chapter 35Configuration ....................................................................................................................................26135.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................26135.2 The Configuration Screen .............................................................................................................26135.3 The Reboot Screen .......................................................................................................................263Chapter 36Diagnostic .........................................................................................................................................26536.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................26536.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................26536.2 What You Need to Know ...............................................................................................................26536.3 Ping & TraceRoute & NsLookup ...................................................................................................26636.4 802.1ag .........................................................................................................................................26736.5 OAM Ping ......................................................................................................................................268Chapter 37Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................27137.1 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs ....................................................................................27137.2 Device Access and Login ..............................................................................................................272
Table of ContentsVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 1337.3 Internet Access .............................................................................................................................27437.4 Wireless Internet Access ...............................................................................................................27537.5 USB Device Connection ................................................................................................................27637.6 UPnP .............................................................................................................................................276Appendix A Customer Support ........................................................................................................277Appendix B Legal Information..........................................................................................................283Index ..................................................................................................................................................289
Table of ContentsVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide14
15PART IUser’s Guide
16
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 17CHAPTER 1Introducing the Device1.1 OverviewThe Device is a wireless VDSL router. It has a DSL port for super-fast Internet access over analog (POTS) telephone lines. The Device supports both Packet Transfer Mode (PTM) and Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM). It is backward compatible with ADSL, ADSL2 and ADSL2+ in case VDSL is not available.Only use firmware for your Device’s specific model. Refer to the label on the bottom of your Device.The Device has a USB port used to share files via a USB memory stick or a USB hard drive. 1.2 Ways to Manage the DeviceUse any of the following methods to manage the Device.• Web Configurator. This is recommended for everyday management of the Device using a (supported) web browser.• TR-069. This is an auto-configuration server used to remotely configure your device.1.3 Good Habits for Managing the DeviceDo the following things regularly to make the Device more secure and to manage the Device more effectively.• Change the password. Use a password that’s not easy to guess and that consists of different types of characters, such as numbers and letters.• Write down the password and put it in a safe place.• Back up the configuration (and make sure you know how to restore it). Restoring an earlier working configuration may be useful if the device becomes unstable or even crashes. If you forget your password, you will have to reset the Device to its factory default settings. If you backed up an earlier configuration file, you would not have to totally re-configure the Device. You could simply restore your last configuration.
Chapter 1 Introducing the DeviceVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide181.4 Applications for the Device Here are some example uses for which the Device is well suited.1.4.1 Internet AccessYour Device provides shared Internet access by connecting the DSL port to the DSL or MODEM jack on a splitter or your telephone jack. You can have multiple WAN services over one ADSL or VDSL. The Device cannot work in ADSL and VDSL mode at the same time.Note: The ADSL and VDSL lines share the same WAN (layer-2) interfaces that you configure in the Device. Refer to Section 5.2 on page 42 for the Net w or k Set t ing > Broadba nd screen.Computers can connect to the Device’s LAN ports (or wirelessly).Figure 1 Device’s Internet Access Application You can also configure IP filtering on the Device for secure Internet access. When the IP filter is on, all incoming traffic from the Internet to your network is blocked by default unless it is initiated from your network. This means that probes from the outside to your network are not allowed, but you can safely browse the Internet and download files.ADSL / VDSLWLANPPPoEIPoEBridgingWANADSL IPoAWANLANLANWLANAAPPPoAIPoEPPPoEBridging
Chapter 1 Introducing the DeviceVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 191.4.2 Device’s USB SupportThe USB port of the Device is used for file-sharing.File SharingUse the built-in USB 2.0 port to share files on a USB memory stick or a USB hard drive (B). You can connect one USB hard drive to the Device at a time. Use FTP to access the files on the USB device.Figure 2 USB File Sharing Application Media ServerYou can also use the Device as a media server. This lets anyone on your network play video, music, and photos from a USB device (B) connected to the Device’s USB port (without having to copy them to another computer). Figure 3 USB Media Server Application BABA
Chapter 1 Introducing the DeviceVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide201.5 LEDs (Lights)The following table describes the behavior of the LEDs. None of the LEDs are on if the Device is not receiving power.1.6 The RESET ButtonIf you forget your password or cannot access the web configurator, you will need to use the RESET button at the back of the device to reload the factory-default configuration file. This means that you will lose all configurations that you had previously and the password will be reset to “1234”. Table 1 LED DescriptionsLED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTIONUSBGreen On The Device recognizes a USB connection.Blinking The Device is sending/receiving data to /from the USB device connected to it.Off The Device does not detect a USB connection.DSLGreen On The ADSL line is up.Blinking The Device is initializing the ADSL line.Orange On The VDSL line is up.Blinking The Device is initializing the VDSL line.Off The DSL line is down.WLAN/WPSGreen On The wireless network is activated.Blinking The Device is communicating with other wireless clients.Orange Blinking The Device is setting up a WPS connection.Off The wireless network is not activated.4~1ETHERNETGreen On The Device has a successful 100 Mbps Ethernet connection with a device on the Local Area Network (LAN). Blinking The Device is sending or receiving data to/from the LAN at 100 Mbps.Off The Device does not have an Ethernet connection with the LAN.INTERNETGreen On The Device has an IP connection but no traffic.Your device has a WAN IP address (either static or assigned by a DHCP server), PPP negotiation was successfully completed (if used) and the DSL connection is up.Blinking The Device is sending or receiving IP traffic.Off There is no Internet connection or the gateway is in bridged mode.Red On The Device attempted to make an IP connection but failed. Possible causes are no response from a DHCP server, no PPPoE response, PPPoE authentication failed.POWERGreen On The Device is receiving power and ready for use.Blinking The Device is self-testing.Red On The Device detected an error while self-testing, or there is a device malfunction.Off The Device is not receiving power.Blinking Firmware upgrade is in progress.
Chapter 1 Introducing the DeviceVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 211Make sure the POW ER LED is on (not blinking).2To set the device back to the factory default settings, press the RESET button for ten seconds or until the POW ER LED begins to blink and then release it. When the POW ER LED begins to blink, the defaults have been restored and the device restarts.1.7 Wireless AccessThe Device is a wireless Access Point (AP) for wireless clients, such as notebook computers or tablets. It allows them to connect to the Internet without having to rely on inconvenient Ethernet cables.You can configure your wireless network in either the built-in Web Configurator, or using the WPS button.Figure 4 Wireless Access Example1.7.1 Using the WLAN/WPS ButtonIf the wireless network is turned off, press the W LAN / W PS button at the back of the Device for one second. Once the W LAN / W PS LED turns green, the wireless network is active.You can also use the W LAN / W PS button to quickly set up a secure wireless connection between the Device and a WPS-compatible client by adding one device at a time.To activate WPS:1Make sure the POW ER LED is on and not blinking.2Press the W LAN / W PS button for five seconds and release it.3Press the WPS button on another WPS-enabled device within range of the Device. The W LAN / W PS LED flashes orange while the Device sets up a WPS connection with the other wireless device. 4Once the connection is successfully made, the W LAN / W PS LED shines green.To turn off the wireless network, press the W LAN / W PS button on the front of the Device for one second. The W LAN / W PS LED turns off when the wireless network is off.
Chapter 1 Introducing the DeviceVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide22
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 23CHAPTER 2The Web Configurator2.1 OverviewThe web configurator is an HTML-based management interface that allows easy device setup and management via Internet browser. Use Internet Explorer 6.0 and later versions or Mozilla Firefox 3 and later versions or Safari 2.0 and later versions. The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels.In order to use the web configurator you need to allow:• Web browser pop-up windows from your device. Web pop-up blocking is enabled by default in Windows XP SP (Service Pack) 2.• JavaScript (enabled by default).• Java permissions (enabled by default).2.1.1 Accessing the Web Configurator1Make sure your Device hardware is properly connected (refer to the Quick Start Guide).2Launch your web browser. If the Device does not automatically re-direct you to the login screen, go to http://192.168.1.1.3A password screen displays. To access the administrative web configurator and manage the Device, type the default username adm in and password 1 2 3 4 in the password screen and click Login. If advanced account security is enabled (see Section 27.2 on page 241) the number of dots that appears when you type the password changes randomly to prevent anyone watching the password field from knowing the length of your password. If you have changed the password, enter your password and click Login. Figure 5 Password Screen
Chapter 2 The Web ConfiguratorVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide244The following screen displays if you have not yet changed your password. It is strongly recommended you change the default password. Enter a new password, retype it to confirm and click Apply; alternatively click Sk ip to proceed to the main menu if you do not want to change the password now.Figure 6 Change Password Screen5The Qu ick St ar t W iza r d screen appears. You can configure the Device’s time zone, basic Internet access, and wireless settings. See Chapter 3 on page 31 for more information.6After you finished or closed the Quick St ar t W iza r d screen, the Net w or k Ma p page appears. Figure 7 Network Map 7Click St a t u s to display the St a t u s screen, where you can view the Device’s interface and system information.
Chapter 2 The Web ConfiguratorVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 252.2 Web Configurator LayoutFigure 8 Screen LayoutAs illustrated above, the main screen is divided into these parts:•A - title bar•B - main window •C - navigation panel2.2.1 Title BarThe title bar provides some icons in the upper right corner.BCA
Chapter 2 The Web ConfiguratorVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide26The icons provide the following functions.2.2.2 Main WindowThe main window displays information and configuration fields. It is discussed in the rest of this document.After you click St a t u s on the Conn e ct ion St a t us page, the St a t u s screen is displayed. See Chapter 4 on page 36 for more information about the St a t u s screen.Table 2 Web Configurator Icons in the Title BarICON DESCRIPTIONQuick Start Click this icon to open screens where you can configure the Device’s time zone Internet access, and wireless settings.Logout Click this icon to log out of the web configurator.
Chapter 2 The Web ConfiguratorVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 27If you click Virt ual D evice on the Syst e m I nfo screen, a visual graphic appears, showing the connection status of the Device’s ports. The connected ports are in color and disconnected ports are gray.Figure 9 Virtual Device2.2.3 Navigation PanelUse the menu items on the navigation panel to open screens to configure Device features. The following tables describe each menu item. Table 3 Navigation Panel SummaryLINK TAB FUNCTIONConnection Status This screen shows the network status of the Device and computers/devices connected to it.Network Setting
Chapter 2 The Web ConfiguratorVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide28Broadband Broadband Use this screen to view and configure ISP parameters, WAN IP address assignment, and other advanced properties. You can also add new WAN connections.3G Backup Use this screen to configure 3G WAN connection.Advanced Use this screen to enable or disable PTM over ADSL, Annex M/Annex J, and DSL PhyR functions.8021x Use this screen to view and configure the IEEE 802.1x settings on the Device.Ethernet WAN Use this screen to configure a LAN port as an ethernet WAN portWireless General Use this screen to configure the wireless LAN settings and WLAN authentication/security settings. More AP Use this screen to configure multiple BSSs on the Device.MAC AuthenticationUse this screen to block or allow wireless traffic from wireless devices of certain SSIDs and MAC addresses to the Device.WPS Use this screen to configure and view your WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) settings.WMM Use this screen to enable or disable Wi-Fi MultiMedia (WMM).WDS Use this screen to set up Wireless Distribution System (WDS) links to other access points.Others Use this screen to configure advanced wireless settings.Channel Status Use this screen to scan wireless LAN channel noises and view the results.Home Networking LAN Setup Use this screen to configure LAN TCP/IP settings, and other advanced properties.Static DHCP Use this screen to assign specific IP addresses to individual MAC addresses.UPnP Use this screen to turn UPnP and UPnP NAT-T on or off.Additional SubnetUse this screen to configure IP alias and public static IP.STB Vendor ID Use this screen to have the Device automatically create static DHCP entries for Set Top Box (STB) devices when they request IP addresses.LAN VLAN Use this screen to control the VLAN ID and IEEE 802.1p priority tags of traffic sent out through individual LAN ports.Routing Static Route Use this screen to view and set up static routes on the Device.Policy ForwardingUse this screen to configure policy routing on the Device.RIP Use this screen to configure Routing Information Protocol to exchange routing information with other routers.QoS General Use this screen to enable QoS and traffic prioritizing. You can also configure the QoS rules and actions.Queue Setup Use this screen to configure QoS queues.Class Setup Use this screen to define a classifier.Policer Setup Use these screens to configure QoS policers.Monitor Use this screen to view QoS packets statistics.Table 3 Navigation Panel Summary (continued)LINK TAB FUNCTION
Chapter 2 The Web ConfiguratorVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 29NAT Port Forwarding Use this screen to make your local servers visible to the outside world.Applications Use this screen to configure servers behind the Device.Port Triggering Use this screen to change your Device’s port triggering settings.DMZ Use this screen to configure a default server which receives packets from ports that are not specified in the Port For w a r ding screen.ALG Use this screen to enable or disable SIP ALG.Address Mapping Use this screen to change your Device’s address mapping settings.DNS DNS Entry Use this screen to view and configure DNS routes.Dynamic DNS Use this screen to allow a static hostname alias for a dynamic IP address.Interface Group Use this screen to map a port to a PVC or bridge group.USB Device File Sharing Use this screen to enable file sharing via the Device.Media Server Use this screen to use the Device as a media server.Printer Server Use this screen to enable the print server on the Device and get the model name of the associated printer.Security SettingsFirewall General Use this screen to configure the security level of your firewall.Service Use this screen to add Internet services and configure firewall rules.Access Control Use this screen to enable specific traffic directions for network services.DoS Use this screen to activate protection against Denial of Service (DoS) attacks.MAC Filter Use this screen to block or allow traffic from devices of certain MAC addresses to the Device.Parental Control Use this screen to block web sites with the specific URL.Scheduler Rule Use this screen to configure the days and times when a configured restriction (such as parental control) is enforced.Certificates Local Certificates Use this screen to view a summary list of certificates and manage certificates and certification requests.Trusted CA Use this screen to view and manage the list of the trusted CAs.IPSec VPN Use this screen to add or edit VPN policies.System MonitorLog System Log Use this screen to view the status of events that occurred to the Device. You can export or e-mail the logs.Security Log Use this screen to view the login record of the Device. You can export or e-mail the logs.Traffic Status WAN Use this screen to view the status of all network traffic going through the WAN port of the Device.LAN Use this screen to view the status of all network traffic going through the LAN ports of the Device.NAT Use this screen to view NAT statistics for connected hosts.ARP Table Use this screen to view the ARP table. It displays the IP and MAC address of each DHCP connection.Table 3 Navigation Panel Summary (continued)LINK TAB FUNCTION
Chapter 2 The Web ConfiguratorVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide30IGMP Group Status Use this screen to view the status of all IGMP settings on the Device.xDSL Statistics Use this screen to view the Device’s xDSL traffic statistics.3G Monitor Use this screen to look at 3G Internet connection status. MaintenanceUser Account Use this screen to change user password on the Device. Remote MGMT Use this screen to enable specific traffic directions for network services.TR-069 Client Use this screen to configure the Device to be managed by an Auto Configuration Server (ACS).TR-064 Client Use this screen to enable management via TR-064 on the LAN.Time Use this screen to change your Device’s time and date.Email Notification Use this screen to configure up to two mail servers and sender addresses on the Device.Log Setting Use this screen to change your Device’s log settings.Firmware Upgrade Use this screen to upload firmware to your device.Configuration Use this screen to backup and restore your device’s configuration (settings) or reset the factory default settings.Reboot Use this screen to reboot the Device without turning the power off.Diagnostic Ping & Traceroute & NslookupUse this screen to identify problems with the DSL connection. You can use Ping, TraceRoute, or Nslookup to help you identify problems.802.1ag Use this screen to configure CFM (Connectivity Fault Management) MD (maintenance domain) and MA (maintenance association), perform connectivity tests and view test reports.OAM Ping Use this screen to view information to help you identify problems with the DSL connection.Table 3 Navigation Panel Summary (continued)LINK TAB FUNCTION
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 31CHAPTER 3Quick Start3.1 OverviewUse the Quick Start screens to configure the Device’s time zone, basic Internet access, and wireless settings.Note: See the technical reference chapters (starting on page 33) for background information on the features in this chapter.3.2 Quick Start Setup1The Quick Start Wizard appears automatically after login. Or you can click the Click St a r t icon in the top right corner of the web configurator to open the quick start screens. Select the time zone of the Device’s location and click N e x t . Figure 10 Time Zone
Chapter 3 Quick StartVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide322Enter your Internet connection information in this screen. The screen and fields to enter may vary depending on your current connection type. Click N e xt . Click N e x t .Figure 11 Internet Connection3Turn the wireless LAN on or off. If you keep it on, record the security settings so you can configure your wireless clients to connect to the Device. Click Save.Figure 12 Internet Connection4Your Device saves your settings and attempts to connect to the Internet.
33PART IITechnical Reference
34
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 35CHAPTER 4Network Map and Status Screens4.1 OverviewAfter you log into the Web Configurator, the N et w or k M a p screen appears. This shows the network connection status of the Device and clients connected to it. You can use the St a t u s screen to look at the current status of the Device, system resources, and interfaces (LAN, WAN, and WLAN). 4.2 The Network Map ScreenUse this screen to view the network connection status of the device and its clients. A warning message appears if there is a connection problem. If you prefer to view the status in a list, click List View in the View in g M ode selection box. You can configure how often you want the Device to update this screen in Refresh I nt erval.Figure 13 Network Map: Icon Mode Figure 14 Network Map: List Mode
Chapter 4 Network Map and Status ScreensVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide36In I con M ode, if you want to view information about a client, click the client’s name and I nfo. Click the IP address if you want to change it. If you want to change the name or icon of the client, click Cha nge icon/ na m e . In List M ode , you can also view the client’s information.4.3 The Status Screen Use this screen to view the status of the Device. Click St a t u s to open this screen.Figure 15 Status Screen
Chapter 4 Network Map and Status ScreensVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 37Each field is described in the following table.Table 4 Status ScreenLABEL DESCRIPTIONRefresh Interval Select how often you want the Device to update this screen.Device InformationHost Name This field displays the Device system name. It is used for identification. Model Number This shows the model number of your Device.Firmware Version This is the current version of the firmware inside the Device. WAN Information (These fields display when you have a WAN connection.)WAN Type This field displays the current WAN connection type.MAC Address This shows the WAN Ethernet adapter MAC (Media Access Control) Address of your Device.IP Address This field displays the current IP address of the Device in the WAN. Click Re le a se to release your IP address to 0.0.0.0. If you want to renew your IP address, click Ren e w .IP Subnet Mask This field displays the current subnet mask in the WAN.Encapsulation This field displays the current encapsulation method.LAN InformationIP Address This is the current IP address of the Device in the LAN. IP Subnet Mask This is the current subnet mask in the LAN.DHCP This field displays what DHCP services the Device is providing to the LAN. Choices are:Ser v er - The Device is a DHCP server in the LAN. It assigns IP addresses to other computers in the LAN.Rela y - The Device acts as a surrogate DHCP server and relays DHCP requests and responses between the remote server and the clients.N on e - The Device is not providing any DHCP services to the LAN.MAC Address This shows the LAN Ethernet adapter MAC (Media Access Control) Address of your Device.WLAN InformationMAC Address This shows the wireless adapter MAC (Media Access Control) Address of your Device. Status This displays whether WLAN is activated.SSID This is the descriptive name used to identify the Device in a wireless LAN. Channel This is the channel number used by the Device now.Security This displays the type of security mode the Device is using in the wireless LAN.802.11 Mode This displays the type of 802.11 mode the Device is using in the wireless LAN.WPS This displays whether WPS is activated. SecurityFirewall This displays the firewall’s current security level.System StatusSystem Up Time This field displays how long the Device has been running since it last started up. The Device starts up when you plug it in, when you restart it (Mainten a nce > Re boot ), or when you reset it.Current Date/Time This field displays the current date and time in the Device. You can change this in Mainten a nce > Tim e Set t ing.
Chapter 4 Network Map and Status ScreensVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide38System ResourceCPU Usage This field displays what percentage of the Device’s processing ability is currently used. When this percentage is close to 100%, the Device is running at full load, and the throughput is not going to improve anymore. If you want some applications to have more throughput, you should turn off other applications (for example, using QoS; see Chapter 9 on page 131).Memory Usage This field displays what percentage of the Device’s memory is currently used. Usually, this percentage should not increase much. If memory usage does get close to 100%, the Device is probably becoming unstable, and you should restart the device. See Section 35.2 on page 261, or turn off the device (unplug the power) for a few seconds.Table 4 Status Screen (continued)LABEL DESCRIPTION
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 39CHAPTER 5Broadband5.1 OverviewThis chapter discusses the Device’s Broadba n d screens. Use these screens to configure your Device for Internet access.A WAN (Wide Area Network) connection is an outside connection to another network or the Internet. It connects your private networks, such as a LAN (Local Area Network) and other networks, so that a computer in one location can communicate with computers in other locations.Figure 16 LAN and WAN3G (third generation) standards for the sending and receiving of voice, video, and data in a mobile environment. You can attach a 3G wireless adapter to the USB port and set the Device to use this 3G connection as your WAN or a backup when the wired WAN connection fails.Figure 17 3G WAN Connection 5.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter•Use the Broa dba n d screen to view, remove or add a WAN interface. You can also configure the WAN settings on the Device for Internet access (Section 5.2 on page 42).•Use the 3 G Ba ckup screen to configure 3G WAN connection (Section 5.3 on page 51). WAN
Chapter 5 BroadbandVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide40•Use the Adva n ce d screen to enable or disable PTM over ADSL, Annex M/Annex J, and DSL PhyR functions (Section 5.4 on page 55). •Use the 8 0 2 1 x screen to view and configure the IEEE 802.1X settings on the Device (Section 5.5 on page 56). 5.1.2 What You Need to KnowThe following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter.Encapsulation MethodEncapsulation is used to include data from an upper layer protocol into a lower layer protocol. To set up a WAN connection to the Internet, you need to use the same encapsulation method used by your ISP (Internet Service Provider). If your ISP offers a dial-up Internet connection using PPPoE (PPP over Ethernet), they should also provide a username and password (and service name) for user authentication.WAN IP AddressThe WAN IP address is an IP address for the Device, which makes it accessible from an outside network. It is used by the Device to communicate with other devices in other networks. It can be static (fixed) or dynamically assigned by the ISP each time the Device tries to access the Internet.If your ISP assigns you a static WAN IP address, they should also assign you the subnet mask and DNS server IP address(es).Table 5 WAN Setup Overview LAYER-2 INTERFACE INTERNET CONNECTIONCONNECTION DSL LINK TYPE MODE ENCAPSULATION CONNECTION SETTINGSADSL/VDSL over PTMN/A Routing PPPoE PPP information, IPv4/IPv6 IP address, routing feature, DNS server, VLAN, QoS, and MTUIPoE IPv4/IPv6 IP address, routing feature, DNS server, VLAN, QoS, and MTUBridge N/A VLAN and QoSADSL over ATM EoA Routing PPPoE/PPP0A ATM PVC configuration, PPP information, IPv4/IPv6 IP address, routing feature, DNS server, VLAN, QoS, and MTUIPoE/IPoA ATM PVC configuration, IPv4/IPv6 IP address, routing feature, DNS server, VLAN, QoS, and MTUBridge N/A ATM PVC configuration, and QoSEtherWAN N/A Routing PPPoE PPP user name and password, WAN IPv4/IPv6 IP address, routing feature, DNS server, VLAN, QoS, and MTUIPoE WAN IPv4/IPv6 IP address, NAT, DNS server and routing featureBridge N/A VLAN and QoS
Chapter 5 BroadbandVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 41ATMAsynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) is a WAN networking technology that provides high-speed data transfer. ATM uses fixed-size packets of information called cells. With ATM, a high QoS (Quality of Service) can be guaranteed. ATM uses a connection-oriented model and establishes a virtual circuit (VC) between Finding Out MorePTMPacket Transfer Mode (PTM) is packet-oriented and supported by the VDSL2 standard. In PTM, packets are encapsulated directly in the High-level Data Link Control (HDLC) frames. It is designed to provide a low-overhead, transparent way of transporting packets over DSL links, as an alternative to ATM.3G 3G (Third Generation) is a digital, packet-switched wireless technology. Bandwidth usage is optimized as multiple users share the same channel and bandwidth is only allocated to users when they send data. It allows fast transfer of voice and non-voice data and provides broadband Internet access to mobile devices. IPv6 IntroductionIPv6 (Internet Protocol version 6), is designed to enhance IP address size and features. The increase in IPv6 address size to 128 bits (from the 32-bit IPv4 address) allows up to 3.4 x 1038 IP addresses. The Device can use IPv4/IPv6 dual stack to connect to IPv4 and IPv6 networks, and supports IPv6 rapid deployment (6RD). IPv6 AddressingThe 128-bit IPv6 address is written as eight 16-bit hexadecimal blocks separated by colons (:). This is an example IPv6 address 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000.IPv6 addresses can be abbreviated in two ways:• Leading zeros in a block can be omitted. So 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000 can be written as 2001:db8:1a2b:15:0:0:1a2f:0. • Any number of consecutive blocks of zeros can be replaced by a double colon. A double colon can only appear once in an IPv6 address. So 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f:0000:0000:0015 can be written as 2001:0db8::1a2f:0000:0000:0015, 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f::0015, 2001:db8::1a2f:0:0:15 or 2001:db8:0:0:1a2f::15.IPv6 Prefix and Prefix LengthSimilar to an IPv4 subnet mask, IPv6 uses an address prefix to represent the network address. An IPv6 prefix length specifies how many most significant bits (start from the left) in the address
Chapter 5 BroadbandVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide42compose the network address. The prefix length is written as “/x” where x is a number. For example, 2001:db8:1a2b:15::1a2f:0/32means that the first 32 bits (2001:db8) is the subnet prefix. IPv6 Subnet MaskingBoth an IPv6 address and IPv6 subnet mask compose of 128-bit binary digits, which are divided into eight 16-bit blocks and written in hexadecimal notation. Hexadecimal uses four bits for each character (1 ~ 10, A ~ F). Each block’s 16 bits are then represented by four hexadecimal characters. For example, FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FC00:0000:0000:0000.5.1.3 Before You BeginYou need to know your Internet access settings such as encapsulation and WAN IP address. Get this information from your ISP.5.2 The Broadband ScreenUse this screen to change your Device’s Internet access settings. Click Net w or k Set t ing > Broadba n d from the menu. The summary table shows you the configured WAN services (connections) on the Device.Figure 18 Network Setting > Broadband The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 6 Network Setting > BroadbandLABEL DESCRIPTIONAdd new WAN InterfaceClick this button to create a new connection.# This is the index number of the entry.Name This is the service name of the connection.Type This shows whether it is an ATM, PTM, or Ethernet connection.Mode This shows whether the connection is in routing or bridge mode.Encapsulation This is the method of encapsulation used by this connection. 802.1p This indicates the 802.1p priority level assigned to traffic sent through this connection. This displays N / A when there is no priority level assigned.802.1q This indicates the VLAN ID number assigned to traffic sent through this connection. This displays N / A when there is no VLAN ID number assigned.
Chapter 5 BroadbandVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 43IGMP Proxy This shows whether the Device act as an IGMP proxy on this connection.NAT This shows whether NAT is activated or not for this connection. Default GatewayThis shows whether the Device use the WAN interface of this connection as the system default gateway.IPv6 This shows whether IPv6 is activated or not for this connection. IPv6 is not available when the connection uses the bridging service.MLD Proxy This shows whether Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) is activated or not for this connection. MLD is not available when the connection uses the bridging service.Modify/Delete Click the Edit icon to configure the WAN connection.Click the D ele t e icon to remove the WAN connection.Table 6 Network Setting > Broadband (continued)LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 5 BroadbandVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide445.2.1 Add/Edit Internet ConnectionClick Add n e w W AN I n t e r fa ce in the Broadba n d screen or the Edit icon next to an existing WAN interface to configure a WAN connection. The screen varies depending on the interface type, mode, encapsulation, and IPv6/IPv4 mode you select. 5.2.1.1 Routing ModeUse Rou t ing mode if your ISP give you one IP address only and you want multiple computers to share an Internet account. The following example screen displays when you select the ADSL over ATM connection type, Rou t in g mode, and PPPoE encapsulation. The screen varies when you select other interface type, encapsulation, and IPv6/IPv4 mode.Figure 19 Routing ModeThe following table describes the labels in this screen.Table 7 Routing ModeLABEL DESCRIPTIONGeneralActive Select this to activate the WAN configuration settings.Name Specify a descriptive name for this connection.Type Select whether it is an ADSL/VDSL over PTM, ADSL over ATM connection or Ethernet.Mode Select Ro ut in g if your ISP give you one IP address only and you want multiple computers to share an Internet account.
Chapter 5 BroadbandVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 45Encapsulation Select the method of encapsulation used by your ISP from the drop-down list box. This option is available only when you select Rou t in g in the Mode field. The choices depend on the connection type you selected. If your connection type is ADSL/VD SL over PTM, the choices are PPPoE and I PoE. If your connection type is AD SL ove r ATM , the choices are PPPoE, PPPoA, I PoE and I PoA. IPv6/IPv4 Mode Select I Pv 4 On ly if you want the Device to run IPv4 only. Select I Pv6 / I Pv4 D ualSt a ck to allow the Device to run IPv4 and IPv6 at the same time.Select I Pv6 On ly if you want the Device to run IPv6 only.ATM PVC Configuration (These fields appear when the Type is set to ADSL ove r ATM.)VPI The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255. Enter the VPI assigned to you.VCI The valid range for the VCI is 32 to 65535 (0 to 31 is reserved for local management of ATM traffic). Enter the VCI assigned to you.DSL Link Type This field is not editable. The selection depends on the setting in the En ca p su la t ion field.EoA (Ethernet over ATM) uses an Ethernet header in the packet, so that you can have multiple services/connections over one PVC. You can set each connection to have its own MAC address or all connections share one MAC address but use different VLAN IDs for different services. EoA supports ENET ENCAP (IPoE), PPPoE and RFC1483/2684 bridging encapsulation methods. PPPoA (PPP over ATM) allows just one PPPoA connection over a PVC.I PoA (IP over ATM) allows just one RFC 1483 routing connection over a PVC.Encapsulation ModeSelect the method of multiplexing used by your ISP from the drop-down list box. Choices are:•LLC/ SN AP- BRI D GI N G: In LCC encapsulation, bridged PDUs are encapsulated by identifying the type of the bridged media in the SNAP header. This is available only when you select I PoE or PPPoE in the Se le ct D SL Link Ty pe field. •VC/ M UX: In VC multiplexing, each protocol is carried on a single ATM virtual circuit (VC). To transport multiple protocols, the Device needs separate VCs. There is a binding between a VC and the type of the network protocol carried on the VC. This reduces payload overhead since there is no need to carry protocol information in each Protocol Data Unit (PDU) payload.•LLC/ EN CAPSU LATI O N : More than one protocol can be carried over the same VC. This is available only when you select PPPoA in the En ca psula t io n field.•LLC/ SN AP- ROU TI N G: In LCC encapsulation, an IEEE 802.2 Logical Link Control (LLC) header is prefixed to each routed PDU to identify the PDUs. The LCC header can be followed by an IEEE 802.1a SubNetwork Attachment Point (SNAP) header. This is available only when you select I PoA in the En capsula t ion field. Service CategorySelect UBR W it hou t PCR or UBR W it h PCR for applications that are non-time sensitive, such as e-mail. Select CBR (Continuous Bit Rate) to specify fixed (always-on) bandwidth for voice or data traffic. Select N on Re a lt im e VBR (non real-time Variable Bit Rate) for connections that do not require closely controlled delay and delay variation.Select Re a lt im e VBR (real-time Variable Bit Rate) for applications with bursty connections that require closely controlled delay and delay variation. Peak Cell Rate Divide the DSL line rate (bps) by 424 (the size of an ATM cell) to find the Peak Cell Rate (PCR). This is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells. Type the PCR here.This field is not available when you select UBR W it hou t PCR.Sustainable Cell RateThe Sustainable Cell Rate (SCR) sets the average cell rate (long-term) that can be transmitted. Type the SCR, which must be less than the PCR. Note that system default is 0 cells/sec. This field is available only when you select N on Re alt im e VBR or Realt im e VBR.Table 7 Routing Mode (continued)LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 5 BroadbandVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide46Maximum Burst SizeMaximum Burst Size (MBS) refers to the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the peak rate. Type the MBS, which is less than 65535.This field is available only when you select N on Re alt im e VBR or Realt im e VBR.PPP InformationThis is available only when you select PPPoE or PPPoA in the Mode field.PPP User Name Enter the user name exactly as your ISP assigned. If assigned a name in the form user@domain where domain identifies a service name, then enter both components exactly as given.PPP Password Enter the password associated with the user name above.PPP Auto ConnectSelect this option if you do not want the connection to time out.IDLE Timeout This value specifies the time in minutes that elapses before the router automatically disconnects from the PPPoE server.This field is not configurable if you select PPP Aut o Conn ect .PPPoE Service Name Enter the name of your PPPoE service here.PPPoE PassthroughThis field is available when you select PPPoE encapsulation. In addition to the Device’s built-in PPPoE client, you can enable PPPoE pass through to allow up to ten hosts on the LAN to use PPPoE client software on their computers to connect to the ISP via the Device. Each host can have a separate account and a public WAN IP address.PPPoE pass through is an alternative to NAT for application where NAT is not appropriate.Disable PPPoE pass through if you do not need to allow hosts on the LAN to use PPPoE client software on their computers to connect to the ISP.IP Address This is available only when you select I Pv4 Only or I Pv6 / I Pv4 D ualSt a ck in the I Pv 6 /I Pv4 M ode field.Obtain an IP Address AutomaticallyA static IP address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP address is not fixed; the ISP assigns you a different one each time you connect to the Internet. Select this if you have a dynamic IP address.Static IP Address Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address. IP Address Enter the static IP address provided by your ISP.Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask provided by your ISP.Gateway IP Address Enter the gateway IP address provided by your ISP.Routing Feature This is available only when you select I Pv4 Only or I Pv 6 / I Pv4 Du a lSt a ck in the I Pv6 /I Pv4 M ode field.NAT Enable Select this option to activate NAT on this connection.IGMP Proxy Enable Internet Group Multicast Protocol (IGMP) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group - it is not used to carry user data.Select this option to have the Device act as an IGMP proxy on this connection. This allows the Device to get subscribing information and maintain a joined member list for each multicast group. It can reduce multicast traffic significantly.Apply as Default GatewaySelect this option to have the Device use the WAN interface of this connection as the system default gateway.DNS Server This is available only when you select I Pv4 Only or I Pv6 / I Pv 4 D u alSt a ck in the I Pv6 /I Pv4 M ode field.Table 7 Routing Mode (continued)LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 5 BroadbandVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 47DNS Select Dy na m ic if you want the Device use the DNS server addresses assigned by your ISP.Select St a t ic if you want the Device use the DNS server addresses you configure manually.DNS Server 1 Enter the first DNS server address assigned by the ISP.DNS Server 2 Enter the second DNS server address assigned by the ISP.WAN MAC AddressFactory Default Select Fact or y D efau lt to use the factory assigned default MAC address.Clone the computer’s MAC addressSelect this option and enter the IP address of the computer on the LAN whose MAC you are cloning. It is advisable to clone the MAC address from a computer on your LAN even if your ISP does not presently require MAC address authentication. Set WAN MAC AddressSelect this option and enter the MAC address you want to use.IPv6 Address This is available only when you select I Pv6 / I Pv4 Dua lSt a ck or I Pv6 On ly in the I Pv6 /I Pv4 M ode field.IPv6 Address Select Au t om a t ic if you want to have the Device use the IPv6 prefix from the connected router’s Router Advertisement (RA) to generate an IPv6 address. Select the Get I Pv6 Address From D HCPv6 Ser ve r check box if you want to obtain an IPv6 address from a DHCPv6 server. The IP address assigned by a DHCPv6 server has priority over the IP address automatically generated by the Device using the IPv6 prefix from an RA. This option is available only when you choose to get your IPv6 address automatically.Select St a t ic if you have a fixed IPv6 address assigned by your ISP.Select N o ne to not assign any IPv6 address to this WAN connection. WAN IPv6 Address Enter the IPv6 address assigned by your ISP.Prefix Length Enter the address prefix length to specify how many most significant bits in an IPv6 address compose the network address.Next Hop Enter the IP address of the next-hop gateway. The gateway is a router or switch on the same segment as your Device's interface(s). The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations.IPv6 Routing FeatureYou can enable IPv6 routing features in the following section.MLD Proxy Enable Select this check box to have the Device act as an MLD proxy on this connection. This allows the Device to get subscription information and maintain a joined member list for each multicast group. It can reduce multicast traffic significantly.Apply as Default GatewaySelect this option to have the Device use the WAN interface of this connection as the system default gateway.IPv6 DNS Server Configure the IPv6 DNS server in the following section.IPv6 DNS Select D yn am ic to have the Device get the IPv6 DNS server addresses from the ISP automatically.Select St a t ic to have the Device use the IPv6 DNS server addresses you configure manually.IPv6 DNS Server 1Enter the first IPv6 DNS server address assigned by the ISP.IPv6 DNS Server 2Enter the second IPv6 DNS server address assigned by the ISP.Table 7 Routing Mode (continued)LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 5 BroadbandVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide485.2.1.2 Bridge ModeClick the Add new W AN I nt erface in the N e t w or k Set t ing > Br oadba n d screen or the Edit icon next to the connection you want to configure. Select Br idge as the encapsulation mode. The screen varies depending on the interface type you select. If you select AD SL/ VDSL ove r PTM as the interface type, the following screen appears.Figure 20 Bridge Mode (ADSL/VDSL over PTM)VLAN These fields appear when the Ty pe is set to ADSL/ VD SL ov er PTM .Active Select this option to add the VLAN tag (specified below) to the outgoing traffic through this connection.802.1p IEEE 802.1p defines up to 8 separate traffic types by inserting a tag into a MAC-layer frame that contains bits to define class of service. Select the IEEE 802.1p priority level (from 0 to 7) to add to traffic through this connection. The greater the number, the higher the priority level.802.1q Type the VLAN ID number (from 1 to 4094) for traffic through this connection.QoSRate Limit Enter the rate limit for the connection. This is the maximum transmission rate allowed for traffic on this connection.MTUMTU Size Enter the MTU (Maximum Transfer Unit) size for this traffic.Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Device.Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.Table 7 Routing Mode (continued)LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 5 BroadbandVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 49The following table describes the fields in this screen.If you select AD SL over ATM as the interface type, the following screen appears.Figure 21 Bridge Mode (ADSL over ATM)Table 8 Bridge Mode (ADSL/VDSL over PTM)LABEL DESCRIPTIONGeneralActive Select this to activate the WAN configuration settings.Name Enter a service name of the connection.Type Select ADSL/ VDSL ov er PTM as the interface that you want to configure. The Device uses the VDSL technology for data transmission over the DSL port.Mode Select Bridge when your ISP provides you more than one IP address and you want the connected computers to get individual IP address from ISP’s DHCP server directly. If you select Br idge, you cannot use routing functions, such as QoS, Firewall, DHCP server and NAT on traffic from the selected LAN port(s).VLAN This section is available only when you select AD SL/ VD SL ove r PTM in the Type field.Active Select this to add the VLAN Tag (specified below) to the outgoing traffic through this connection.802.1p IEEE 802.1p defines up to 8 separate traffic types by inserting a tag into a MAC-layer frame that contains bits to define class of service. Select the IEEE 802.1p priority level (from 0 to 7) to add to traffic through this connection. The greater the number, the higher the priority level.802.1q Type the VLAN ID number (from 0 to 4094) for traffic through this connection.QoSRate Limit Enter the rate limit for the connection. This is the maximum transmission rate allowed for traffic on this connection.Apply Click Apply to save your changes.Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Chapter 5 BroadbandVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide50The following table describes the fields in this screen.Table 9 Bridge Mode (ADSL over ATM)LABEL DESCRIPTIONGeneralActive Select this to activate the WAN configuration settings.Name Enter a service name of the connection.Type Select AD SL over ATM as the interface for which you want to configure here. The Device uses the ADSL technology for data transmission over the DSL port.Mode Select Bridge when your ISP provides you more than one IP address and you want the connected computers to get individual IP address from ISP’s DHCP server directly. If you select Br idge, you cannot use routing functions, such as QoS, Firewall, DHCP server and NAT on traffic from the selected LAN port(s).ATM PVC Configuration (These fields appear when the Type is set to ADSL ove r ATM.)VPI The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255. Enter the VPI assigned to you.VCI The valid range for the VCI is 32 to 65535 (0 to 31 is reserved for local management of ATM traffic). Enter the VCI assigned to you.DSL Link Type This field is not editable. The selection depends on the setting in the Enca psu la t ion field.EoA (Ethernet over ATM) uses an Ethernet header in the packet, so that you can have multiple services/connections over one PVC. You can set each connection to have its own MAC address or all connections share one MAC address but use different VLAN IDs for different services. EoA supports ENET ENCAP (IPoE), PPPoE and RFC1483/2684 bridging encapsulation methods. PPPoA (PPP over ATM) allows just one PPPoA connection over a PVC.I PoA (IP over ATM) allows just one RFC 1483 routing connection over a PVC.Encapsulation ModeSelect the method of multiplexing used by your ISP from the drop-down list box. Choices are:•LLC/ SN AP- BRI D GI N G: In LCC encapsulation, bridged PDUs are encapsulated by identifying the type of the bridged media in the SNAP header. This is available only when you select I PoE or PPPoE in the Select DSL Link Type field. •VC/ M UX: In VC multiplexing, each protocol is carried on a single ATM virtual circuit (VC). To transport multiple protocols, the Device needs separate VCs. There is a binding between a VC and the type of the network protocol carried on the VC. This reduces payload overhead since there is no need to carry protocol information in each Protocol Data Unit (PDU) payload.•LLC/ EN CAPSU LATI ON : More than one protocol can be carried over the same VC. This is available only when you select PPPoA in the En ca psu la t ion field.•LLC/ SN AP- ROU TI N G: In LCC encapsulation, an IEEE 802.2 Logical Link Control (LLC) header is prefixed to each routed PDU to identify the PDUs. The LCC header can be followed by an IEEE 802.1a SubNetwork Attachment Point (SNAP) header. This is available only when you select I PoA in the Encapsula t ion field. Service CategorySelect UBR W it hout PCR or UBR W it h PCR for applications that are non-time sensitive, such as e-mail. Select CBR (Continuous Bit Rate) to specify fixed (always-on) bandwidth for voice or data traffic. Select N on Re a lt im e VBR (non real-time Variable Bit Rate) for connections that do not require closely controlled delay and delay variation.Select Realt im e V BR (real-time Variable Bit Rate) for applications with bursty connections that require closely controlled delay and delay variation. Peak Cell Rate Divide the DSL line rate (bps) by 424 (the size of an ATM cell) to find the Peak Cell Rate (PCR). This is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells. Type the PCR here.This field is not available when you select UBR W it h ou t PCR.
Chapter 5 BroadbandVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 515.3 The 3G Backup ScreenUse this screen to configure your 3G settings. Click Ne t w ork Se t t ing > Broa dba nd > 3 G Backup.Sustainable Cell RateThe Sustainable Cell Rate (SCR) sets the average cell rate (long-term) that can be transmitted. Type the SCR, which must be less than the PCR. Note that system default is 0 cells/sec. This field is available only when you select Non Rea lt im e V BR or Re a lt im e VBR.Maximum Burst SizeMaximum Burst Size (MBS) refers to the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the peak rate. Type the MBS, which is less than 65535.This field is available only when you select Non Rea lt im e V BR or Re a lt im e VBR.QoSRate Limit Enter the rate limit for the connection. This is the maximum transmission rate allowed for traffic on this connection.Apply Click Apply to save your changes.Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.Table 9 Bridge Mode (ADSL over ATM) (continued)LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 5 BroadbandVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide52Note: The actual data rate you obtain varies depending the 3G card you use, the signal strength to the service provider’s base station, and so on.Figure 22 Network Setting > Broadband > 3G Backup The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 10 Network Setting > Broadband > 3G BackupLABEL DESCRIPTIONGeneral3G Backup Select Enable to have the Device use the 3G connection as your WAN or a backup when the wired WAN connection fails.Ping Check Select En able if you want the Device to ping check the connection status of your WAN. You can configure the frequency of the ping check and number of consecutive failures before triggering 3G backup.Check Cycle Enter the frequency of the ping check in this field.Consecutive Fail Enter how many consecutive failures are required before 3G backup is triggered.Ping Default GatewaySelect this to have the Device ping the WAN interface’s default gateway IP address.Ping the Host Select this to have the Device ping the particular host name or IP address you typed in this field.3G Connection SettingsCard descriptionThis field displays the manufacturer and model name of your 3G card if you inserted one in the Device. Otherwise, it displays N / A.
Chapter 5 BroadbandVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 53Username Type the user name (of up to 64 ASCII printable characters) given to you by your service provider.Password Type the password (of up to 64 ASCII printable characters) associated with the user name above.PIN A PIN (Personal Identification Number) code is a key to a 3G card. Without the PIN code, you cannot use the 3G card.If your ISP enabled PIN code authentication, enter the 4-digit PIN code (0000 for example) provided by your ISP. If you enter the PIN code incorrectly, the 3G card may be blocked by your ISP and you cannot use the account to access the Internet.If your ISP disabled PIN code authentication, leave this field blank.Dial string Enter the phone number (dial string) used to dial up a connection to your service provider’s base station. Your ISP should provide the phone number.For example, *99# is the dial string to establish a GPRS or 3G connection in Taiwan.APN Enter the APN (Access Point Name) provided by your service provider. Connections with different APNs may provide different services (such as Internet access or MMS (Multi-Media Messaging Service)) and charge method.You can enter up to 32 ASCII printable characters. Spaces are allowed. Connection Select N a ile d UP if you do not want the connection to time out.Select on D e m a n d if you do not want the connection up all the time and specify an idle time-out in the Ma x I dle Tim eout field.Max Idle Timeout This value specifies the time in minutes that elapses before the Device automatically disconnects from the ISP.Obtain an IP Address AutomaticallySelect this option If your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address. Use the following static IP addressSelect this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address. IP Address Enter your WAN IP address in this field if you selected Use t he follow ing st a t ic I P address. Obtain DNS info dynamically Select this to have the Device get the DNS server addresses from the ISP automatically. Use the following static DNS IP addressSelect this to have the Device use the DNS server addresses you configure manually.Primary DNS serverEnter the first DNS server address assigned by the ISP.Secondary DNS serverEnter the second DNS server address assigned by the ISP.Advanced Click this to show the advanced 3G backup settings.Budget SetupEnable Budget ControlSelect Enable to set a monthly limit for the user account of the installed 3G card. You can set a limit on the total traffic and/or call time. The Device takes the actions you specified when a limit is exceeded during the month.Time Budget Select this and specify the amount of time (in hours) that the 3G connection can be used within one month. If you change the value after you configure and enable budget control, the Device resets the statistics.Table 10 Network Setting > Broadband > 3G Backup (continued)LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 5 BroadbandVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide54Data Budget (Mbytes)Select this and specify how much downstream and/or upstream data (in Mega bytes) can be transmitted via the 3G connection within one month.Select Dow nloa d/ Uploa d to set a limit on the total traffic in both directions.Select Dow nload to set a limit on the downstream traffic (from the ISP to the Device).Select Upload to set a limit on the upstream traffic (from the Device to the ISP).If you change the value after you configure and enable budget control, the Device resets the statistics.Data Budget (kPackets)Select this and specify how much downstream and/or upstream data (in k Packets) can be transmitted via the 3G connection within one month.Select Dow nloa d/ Uploa d to set a limit on the total traffic in both directions.Select Dow nload to set a limit on the downstream traffic (from the ISP to the Device).Select Upload to set a limit on the upstream traffic (from the Device to the ISP).If you change the value after you configure and enable budget control, the Device resets the statistics.Reset all budget counters on Select the date on which the Device resets the budget every month. Select la st if you want the Device to reset the budget on the last day of the month. Select spe cific and enter the number of the date you want the Device to reset the budget Reset time and data budget countersClick this button to reset the time and data budgets immediately. The count starts over with the 3G connection’s full configured monthly time and data budgets. This does not affect the normal monthly budget restart; so if you configured the time and data budget counters to reset on the second day of the month and you use this button on the first, the time and data budget counters will still reset on the second.Actions before over budget Specify the actions the Device takes before the time or data limit exceeds.Enable % of time budget/data budget (Mbytes)/data budget (kPackets)Select Enable and enter a number from 1 to 99 in the percentage fields. If you change the value after you configure and enable budget control, the Device resets the statistics.Actions when over budgetSpecify the actions the Device takes when the time or data limit is exceeded. Current 3G connection Select Kee p to maintain an existing 3G connection or Dr op to disconnect it. Enable Email Notification Select this to enable the e-mail notification function. The Device will e-mail you a notification when there over budget occurs.Mail Server Select a mail server for the e-mail address specified below. If you do not select a mail server, e-mail notifications cannot be sent via e-mail. You must have configured a mail server already in the Ma int e n ance > Em ail N ot ifica tion screen.Over Budget Email TitleType a title that you want to be in the subject line of the e-mail notifications that the Device sends.Send Notification to EmailNotifications are sent to the e-mail address specified in this field. If this field is left blank, notifications cannot be sent via e-mail. Interval Enter the interval of how many minutes you want the Device to e-mail you.Enable Log Select this to activate the logging function at the interval you set in this field. Basic Click this to hide the advanced settings of 3G backup.Table 10 Network Setting > Broadband > 3G Backup (continued)LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 5 BroadbandVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 555.4 The Advanced ScreenUse the Adv a nced screen to enable or disable PTM over ADSL, Annex M, and DSL PhyR functions. The Device supports the PhyR retransmission scheme. PhyR is a retransmission scheme designed to provide protection against noise on the DSL line. It improves voice, video and data transmission resilience by utilizing a retransmission buffer.Click N et w or k Se t t ing > Br oa dband > Adva n ced to display the following screen.Figure 23 Network Setting > Broadband > Advanced The following table describes the labels in this screen. Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Device.Cancel Click Cancel to return to the previous configuration.Table 10 Network Setting > Broadband > 3G Backup (continued)LABEL DESCRIPTIONTable 11 Network Setting > Network Setting > BroadbandLABEL DESCRIPTIONPTM over ADSL Select En able to use PTM over ADSL. Since PTM has less overhead than ATM, some ISPs use PTM over ADSL for better performance.Annex M You can enable Ann ex M for the Device to use double upstream mode to increase the maximum upstream transfer rate.PhyR US Enable or disable PhyR US (upstream) for upstream transmission to the WAN. PhyR US should be enabled if data being transmitted upstream is sensitive to noise. However, enabling PhyR US can decrease the US line rate. Enabling or disabling PhyR will require the CPE to retrain. For PhyR to function, the DSLAM must also support PhyR and have it enabled.PhyR DS Enable or disable Ph yR D S (downstream) for downstream transmission from the WAN. PhyR DS should be enabled if data being transmitted downstream is sensitive to noise. However, enabling PhyR DS can decrease the DS line rate. Enabling or disabling PhyR will require the CPE to retrain. For PhyR to function, the DSLAM must also support PhyR and have it enabled.Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Device.Cancel Click Cancel to return to the previous configuration.
Chapter 5 BroadbandVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide565.5 The 8021x ScreenYou can view and configure the 802.1X authentication settings in the 8 0 2 1 x screen. Click Net w or k Set t ing > Br oa dband > 8 0 2 1 x to display the following screen.Figure 24 Network Setting > Broadband > 8021xThe following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 12 Network Setting > Network Setting > 8021xLABEL DESCRIPTION# This is the index number of the entry.Status This field displays whether the authentication is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this authentication is active. A gray bulb signifies that this authentication is not active.Interface This is the interface that uses the authentication. This displays N / A when there is no interface assigned.EAP Identity This shows the EAP identity of the authentication. This displays N / A when there is no EAP identity assigned.EAP method This shows the EAP method used in the authentication. This displays N / A when there is no EAP method assigned.Bidirectional AuthenticationThis shows whether bidirectional authentication is allowed. Certificate This shows the certificate used for this authentication. This displays N / A when there is no certificate assigned.Trusted CA This shows the Trusted CA used for this authentication. This displays N / A when there is no Trusted CA assigned.Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Device.Cancel Click Cancel to return to the previous configuration.
Chapter 5 BroadbandVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 575.5.1 Edit 802.1X Settings Use this screen to edit 802.1X authentication settings. Click the Edit icon next to the rule you want to edit. The screen shown next appears.Figure 25 802.1x: Add/EditThe following table describes the labels in this screen. 5.6 The Ethernet WAN ScreenIf you are using an ethernet WAN connection, you can configure a LAN port as an ethernet WAN port. Click N e t w ork Se t t in g > Broa dba nd > Et her n e t W AN to open this screen.Note: LAN port 4 can operate as an Ethernet WAN port.Table 13 802.1x: Add/EditLABEL DESCRIPTIONActive This field allows you to activate/deactivate the authentication.Select this to enable the authentication. Clear this to disable this authentication without having to delete the entry.Interface This field displays where there is an interface available to select for the 802.1X authentication settings. Select the interface to which to apply the 802.1X authentication settings.EAP Identity Enter the EAP identity of the authentication.EAP method This is the EAP method used for this authentication.Enable Bidirectional AuthenticationSelect this to allow bidirectional authentication.Certificate Select the certificate you want to assign to the authentication. You need to import the certificate in the Se cu r it y > Ce r t ifica t es > Local Cert ifica t es screen.Trusted CA Select the Trusted CA you want to assign to the authentication. You need to import the certificate in the Se cu r it y > Ce r t ifica t es > Tr u sted CA screen.Apply Click Apply to save your changes.Cancel Click Cance l to exit this screen without saving.
Chapter 5 BroadbandVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide58Figure 26 Network Setting > Broadband > Ethernet WAN The following table describes the fields in this screen. 5.7 Technical ReferenceThe following section contains additional technical information about the Device features described in this chapter.EncapsulationBe sure to use the encapsulation method required by your ISP. The Device can work in bridge mode or routing mode. When the Device is in routing mode, it supports the following methods.IP over Ethernet IP over Ethernet (IPoE) is an alternative to PPPoE. IP packets are being delivered across an Ethernet network, without using PPP encapsulation. They are routed between the Ethernet interface and the WAN interface and then formatted so that they can be understood in a bridged environment. For instance, it encapsulates routed Ethernet frames into bridged Ethernet cells. PPP over ATM (PPPoA)PPPoA stands for Point to Point Protocol over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 (AAL5). A PPPoA connection functions like a dial-up Internet connection. The Device encapsulates the PPP session based on RFC1483 and sends it through an ATM PVC (Permanent Virtual Circuit) to the Internet Service Provider’s (ISP) DSLAM (digital access multiplexer). Please refer to RFC 2364 for more information on PPPoA. Refer to RFC 1661 for more information on PPP.Table 14 Network Setting > Broadband > Ethernet WAN LABEL DESCRIPTIONState Select Ena ble to use the Ethernet LAN port as a WAN port on the Device.Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Device.Cancel Click Cance l to exit this screen without saving.
Chapter 5 BroadbandVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 59PPP over Ethernet (PPPoE)Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet (PPPoE) provides access control and billing functionality in a manner similar to dial-up services using PPP. PPPoE is an IETF standard (RFC 2516) specifying how a personal computer (PC) interacts with a broadband modem (DSL, cable, wireless, etc.) connection. For the service provider, PPPoE offers an access and authentication method that works with existing access control systems (for example RADIUS).One of the benefits of PPPoE is the ability to let you access one of multiple network services, a function known as dynamic service selection. This enables the service provider to easily create and offer new IP services for individuals.Operationally, PPPoE saves significant effort for both you and the ISP or carrier, as it requires no specific configuration of the broadband modem at the customer site.By implementing PPPoE directly on the Device (rather than individual computers), the computers on the LAN do not need PPPoE software installed, since the Device does that part of the task. Furthermore, with NAT, all of the LANs’ computers will have access.RFC 1483RFC 1483 describes two methods for Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 (AAL5). The first method allows multiplexing of multiple protocols over a single ATM virtual circuit (LLC-based multiplexing) and the second method assumes that each protocol is carried over a separate ATM virtual circuit (VC-based multiplexing). Please refer to RFC 1483 for more detailed information.MultiplexingThere are two conventions to identify what protocols the virtual circuit (VC) is carrying. Be sure to use the multiplexing method required by your ISP.VC-based MultiplexingIn this case, by prior mutual agreement, each protocol is assigned to a specific virtual circuit; for example, VC1 carries IP, etc. VC-based multiplexing may be dominant in environments where dynamic creation of large numbers of ATM VCs is fast and economical.LLC-based MultiplexingIn this case one VC carries multiple protocols with protocol identifying information being contained in each packet header. Despite the extra bandwidth and processing overhead, this method may be advantageous if it is not practical to have a separate VC for each carried protocol, for example, if charging heavily depends on the number of simultaneous VCs.Traffic ShapingTraffic Shaping is an agreement between the carrier and the subscriber to regulate the average rate and fluctuations of data transmission over an ATM network. This agreement helps eliminate congestion, which is important for transmission of real time data such as audio and video connections.
Chapter 5 BroadbandVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide60Peak Cell Rate (PCR) is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells. This parameter may be lower (but not higher) than the maximum line speed. 1 ATM cell is 53 bytes (424 bits), so a maximum speed of 832Kbps gives a maximum PCR of 1962 cells/sec. This rate is not guaranteed because it is dependent on the line speed.Sustained Cell Rate (SCR) is the mean cell rate of each bursty traffic source. It specifies the maximum average rate at which cells can be sent over the virtual connection. SCR may not be greater than the PCR.Maximum Burst Size (MBS) is the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the PCR. After MBS is reached, cell rates fall below SCR until cell rate averages to the SCR again. At this time, more cells (up to the MBS) can be sent at the PCR again.If the PCR, SCR or MBS is set to the default of "0", the system will assign a maximum value that correlates to your upstream line rate. The following figure illustrates the relationship between PCR, SCR and MBS. Figure 27 Example of Traffic ShapingATM Traffic ClassesThese are the basic ATM traffic classes defined by the ATM Forum Traffic Management 4.0 Specification. Constant Bit Rate (CBR)Constant Bit Rate (CBR) provides fixed bandwidth that is always available even if no data is being sent. CBR traffic is generally time-sensitive (doesn't tolerate delay). CBR is used for connections that continuously require a specific amount of bandwidth. A PCR is specified and if traffic exceeds this rate, cells may be dropped. Examples of connections that need CBR would be high-resolution video and voice.Variable Bit Rate (VBR) The Variable Bit Rate (VBR) ATM traffic class is used with bursty connections. Connections that use the Variable Bit Rate (VBR) traffic class can be grouped into real time (VBR-RT) or non-real time (VBR-nRT) connections. The VBR-RT (real-time Variable Bit Rate) type is used with bursty connections that require closely controlled delay and delay variation. It also provides a fixed amount of bandwidth (a PCR is
Chapter 5 BroadbandVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 61specified) but is only available when data is being sent. An example of an VBR-RT connection would be video conferencing. Video conferencing requires real-time data transfers and the bandwidth requirement varies in proportion to the video image's changing dynamics. The VBR-nRT (non real-time Variable Bit Rate) type is used with bursty connections that do not require closely controlled delay and delay variation. It is commonly used for "bursty" traffic typical on LANs. PCR and MBS define the burst levels, SCR defines the minimum level. An example of an VBR-nRT connection would be non-time sensitive data file transfers.Unspecified Bit Rate (UBR)The Unspecified Bit Rate (UBR) ATM traffic class is for bursty data transfers. However, UBR doesn't guarantee any bandwidth and only delivers traffic when the network has spare bandwidth. An example application is background file transfer.IP Address AssignmentA static IP is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP is not fixed; the ISP assigns you a different one each time. The Single User Account feature can be enabled or disabled if you have either a dynamic or static IP. However the encapsulation method assigned influences your choices for IP address and default gateway.Introduction to VLANs A Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks. Devices on a logical network belong to one group. A device can belong to more than one group. With VLAN, a device cannot directly talk to or hear from devices that are not in the same group(s); the traffic must first go through a router.In Multi-Tenant Unit (MTU) applications, VLAN is vital in providing isolation and security among the subscribers. When properly configured, VLAN prevents one subscriber from accessing the network resources of another on the same LAN, thus a user will not see the printers and hard disks of another user in the same building. VLAN also increases network performance by limiting broadcasts to a smaller and more manageable logical broadcast domain. In traditional switched environments, all broadcast packets go to each and every individual port. With VLAN, all broadcasts are confined to a specific broadcast domain. Introduction to IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN A tagged VLAN uses an explicit tag (VLAN ID) in the MAC header to identify the VLAN membership of a frame across bridges - they are not confined to the switch on which they were created. The VLANs can be created statically by hand or dynamically through GVRP. The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that switches need to process the frame across the network. A tagged frame is four bytes longer than an untagged frame and contains two bytes of TPID (Tag Protocol Identifier), residing within the type/length field of the Ethernet frame) and two bytes of TCI (Tag Control Information), starts after the source address field of the Ethernet frame). The CFI (Canonical Format Indicator) is a single-bit flag, always set to zero for Ethernet switches. If a frame received at an Ethernet port has a CFI set to 1, then that frame should not be forwarded as it is to an untagged port. The remaining twelve bits define the VLAN ID, giving a possible maximum
Chapter 5 BroadbandVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide62number of 4,096 VLANs. Note that user priority and VLAN ID are independent of each other. A frame with VID (VLAN Identifier) of null (0) is called a priority frame, meaning that only the priority level is significant and the default VID of the ingress port is given as the VID of the frame. Of the 4096 possible VIDs, a VID of 0 is used to identify priority frames and value 4095 (FFF) is reserved, so the maximum possible VLAN configurations are 4,094. MulticastIP packets are transmitted in either one of two ways - Unicast (1 sender - 1 recipient) or Broadcast (1 sender - everybody on the network). Multicast delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the network - not everybody and not just 1. Internet Group Multicast Protocol (IGMP) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. IGMP version 2 (RFC 2236) is an improvement over version 1 (RFC 1112) but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use. If you would like to read more detailed information about interoperability between IGMP version 2 and version 1, please see sections 4 and 5 of RFC 2236. The class D IP address is used to identify host groups and can be in the range 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. The address 224.0.0.0 is not assigned to any group and is used by IP multicast computers. The address 224.0.0.1 is used for query messages and is assigned to the permanent group of all IP hosts (including gateways). All hosts must join the 224.0.0.1 group in order to participate in IGMP. The address 224.0.0.2 is assigned to the multicast routers group. At start up, the Device queries all directly connected networks to gather group membership. After that, the Device periodically updates this information.DNS Server Address AssignmentUse Domain Name System (DNS) to map a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa, for instance, the IP address of www.zyxel.com is 204.217.0.2. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it. The Device can get the DNS server addresses in the following ways.1The ISP tells you the DNS server addresses, usually in the form of an information sheet, when you sign up. If your ISP gives you DNS server addresses, manually enter them in the DNS server fields.2If your ISP dynamically assigns the DNS server IP addresses (along with the Device’s WAN IP address), set the DNS server fields to get the DNS server address from the ISP.IPv6 AddressingThe 128-bit IPv6 address is written as eight 16-bit hexadecimal blocks separated by colons (:). This is an example IPv6 address 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000.IPv6 addresses can be abbreviated in two ways:TPID 2 BytesUser Priority 3 BitsCFI1 BitVLAN ID12 Bits
Chapter 5 BroadbandVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 63• Leading zeros in a block can be omitted. So 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000 can be written as 2001:db8:1a2b:15:0:0:1a2f:0. • Any number of consecutive blocks of zeros can be replaced by a double colon. A double colon can only appear once in an IPv6 address. So 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f:0000:0000:0015 can be written as 2001:0db8::1a2f:0000:0000:0015, 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f::0015, 2001:db8::1a2f:0:0:15 or 2001:db8:0:0:1a2f::15.IPv6 Prefix and Prefix LengthSimilar to an IPv4 subnet mask, IPv6 uses an address prefix to represent the network address. An IPv6 prefix length specifies how many most significant bits (start from the left) in the address compose the network address. The prefix length is written as “/x” where x is a number. For example, 2001:db8:1a2b:15::1a2f:0/32means that the first 32 bits (2001:db8) is the subnet prefix.
Chapter 5 BroadbandVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide64
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 65CHAPTER 6Wireless6.1 Overview This chapter describes the Device’s Net w or k Set t ing > W ir e le ss screens. Use these screens to set up your Device’s wireless connection.6.1.1 What You Can Do in this ChapterThis section describes the Device’s W ir e le ss screens. Use these screens to set up your Device’s wireless connection.•Use the Ge n e r a l screen to enable the Wireless LAN, enter the SSID and select the wireless security mode (Section 6.2 on page 66).•Use the More AP screen to set up multiple wireless networks on your Device (Section 6.3 on page 75).•Use the MAC Aut hent icat ion screen to allow or deny wireless clients based on their MAC addresses from connecting to the Device (Section 6.4 on page 78).•Use the W PS screen to enable or disable WPS, view or generate a security PIN (Personal Identification Number) (Section 6.5 on page 79).•Use the W MM screen to enable Wi-Fi MultiMedia (WMM) to ensure quality of service in wireless networks for multimedia applications (Section 6.6 on page 81). •Use the W DS screen to set up a Wireless Distribution System, in which the Device acts as a bridge with other ZyXEL access points (Section 6.7 on page 82).•Use the Ot hers screen to configure wireless advanced features, such as the RTS/CTS Threshold (Section 6.8 on page 84).•Use the Cha nnel St a t us screen to scan wireless LAN channel noises and view the results (Section 6.9 on page 86).
Chapter 6 WirelessVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide666.1.2 What You Need to KnowWireless Basics“Wireless” is essentially radio communication. In the same way that walkie-talkie radios send and receive information over the airwaves, wireless networking devices exchange information with one another. A wireless networking device is just like a radio that lets your computer exchange information with radios attached to other computers. Like walkie-talkies, most wireless networking devices operate at radio frequency bands that are open to the public and do not require a license to use. However, wireless networking is different from that of most traditional radio communications in that there a number of wireless networking standards available with different methods of data encryption.Finding Out MoreSee Section 6.10 on page 86 for advanced technical information on wireless networks.6.2 The General Screen Use this screen to enable the Wireless LAN, enter the SSID and select the wireless security mode.Note: If you are configuring the Device from a computer connected to the wireless LAN and you change the Device’s SSID, channel or security settings, you will lose your wireless connection when you press Apply to confirm. You must then change the wireless settings of your computer to match the Device’s new settings.
Chapter 6 WirelessVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 67Click N e t w o rk Set t ing > W ire less to open the Ge ne ral screen.Figure 28 Network Setting > Wireless > General
Chapter 6 WirelessVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide68The following table describes the general wireless LAN labels in this screen.Table 15 Network Setting > Wireless > GeneralLABEL DESCRIPTIONWireless Network SetupWireless You can Ena ble or Disable the wireless LAN in this field.Band This shows the wireless band which this radio profile is using. 2 .4 GHz is the frequency used by IEEE 802.11b/g/n wireless clients.Channel Set the channel depending on your particular region.Select a channel or use Aut o to have the Device automatically determine a channel to use. If you are having problems with wireless interference, changing the channel may help. Try to use a channel that is as many channels away from any channels used by neighboring APs as possible. The channel number which the Device is currently using then displays next to this field.more.../less Click m ore ... to show more information. Click less to hide them.Bandwidth Select whether the Device uses a wireless channel width of 2 0 MH z or 4 0 MH z, or use Au t o to have the Device automatically select one.A standard 20MHz channel offers transfer speeds of up to 150Mbps whereas a 40MHz channel uses two standard channels and offers speeds of up to 300 Mbps.40MHz (channel bonding or dual channel) bonds two adjacent radio channels to increase throughput. The wireless clients must also support 40 MHz. It is often better to use the 20 MHz setting in a location where the environment hinders the wireless signal. Select 2 0 M H z if you want to lessen radio interference with other wireless devices in your neighborhood or the wireless clients do not support channel bonding.Control SidebandThis is available for some regions when you select a specific channel and set the Bandwidth field to 4 0 M Hz. Set whether the control channel (set in the Cha nne l field) should be in the Low e r or Uppe r range of channel bands.Passphrase TypeIf you set security for the wireless LAN and have the Device generate a password, the setting in this field determines how the Device generates the password.Select N on e to set the Device’s password generation to not be based on a passphrase. Select Fix e d to use a 16 character passphrase for generating a password.Select Varia ble to use a 16 to 63 character passphrase for generating a password.Passphrase Key For a fixed type passphrase enter 16 alphanumeric characters (0-9, A-Z, with no spaces). It must contain both letters and numbers and is case-sensitive.For a variable type passphrase enter 16 to 63 alphanumeric characters (0-9, A-Z, with no spaces). It must contain both letters and numbers and is case-sensitive.Wireless Network SettingsWireless Network Name (SSID)The SSID (Service Set IDentity) identifies the service set with which a wireless device is associated. Wireless devices associating to the access point (AP) must have the same SSID. Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 English keyboard characters) for the wireless LAN. Max clients Specify the maximum number of clients that can connect to this network at the same time.Hide SSID Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station cannot obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool.Client Isolation Select this to keep the wireless clients in this SSID from communicating with each other through the Device.MBSSID/LAN Isolation Select this to keep the wireless clients in this SSID from communicating with clients in other SSIDs or wired LAN devices through the Device.Select both Clien t I sola t ion and M BSSI D / LAN I sola t ion to allow this SSID’s wireless clients to only connect to the Internet through the Device.
Chapter 6 WirelessVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 696.2.1 No SecuritySelect N o Se curit y to allow wireless stations to communicate with the access points without any data encryption or authentication.Note: If you do not enable any wireless security on your Device, your network is accessible to any wireless networking device that is within range.Figure 29 Wireless > General: No SecurityThe following table describes the labels in this screen.Enhanced Multicast Forwarding Select this check box to allow the Device to convert wireless multicast traffic into wireless unicast traffic.Maximum Upstream BandwidthSpecify the maximum rate for upstream wireless traffic to the WAN from this WLAN in kilobits per second (Kbps).Maximum Downstream BandwidthSpecify the maximum rate for downstream wireless traffic to this WLAN from the WAN in kilobits per second (Kbps).BSSID This shows the MAC address of the wireless interface on the Device when wireless LAN is enabled.Security LevelSecurity Mode Select Basic ( W EP, 8 0 2 .1 X ) or M ore Se cur e ( W PA( 2 ) - PSK, W PA( 2 ) ) to add security on this wireless network. The wireless clients which want to associate to this network must have same wireless security settings as the Device. When you select to use a security, additional options appears in this screen. Or you can select N o Secur it y to allow any client to associate this network without any data encryption or authentication.See the following sections for more details about this field.Apply Click Apply to save your changes.Cancel Click Cance l to restore your previously saved settings.Table 15 Network Setting > Wireless > General (continued)LABEL DESCRIPTIONTable 16 Wireless > General: No SecurityLABEL DESCRIPTIONSecurity Level Choose N o Secur it y to allow all wireless connections without data encryption or authentication.
Chapter 6 WirelessVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide706.2.2 Basic (WEP Encryption)WEP encryption scrambles the data transmitted between the wireless stations and the access points (AP) to keep network communications private. Both the wireless stations and the access points must use the same WEP key.Note: WEP is extremely insecure. Its encryption can be broken by an attacker, using widely-available software. It is strongly recommended that you use a more effective security mechanism. Use the strongest security mechanism that all the wireless devices in your network support. For example, use WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK if all your wireless devices support it, or use WPA or WPA2 if your wireless devices support it and you have a RADIUS server. If your wireless devices support nothing stronger than WEP, use the highest encryption level available.Your Device allows you to configure up to four 64-bit or 128-bit WEP keys but only one key can be enabled at any one time.In order to configure and enable WEP encryption, click N e t w o rk Se t t in g > W ir e le ss to display the Gener a l screen, then select Ba sic as the security level.Figure 30 Wireless > General: Basic (WEP) The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 17 Wireless > General: Basic (WEP)LABEL DESCRIPTIONSecurity Level Select Ba sic to enable WEP data encryption.Generate password automatically Select this option to have the Device automatically generate a password. The password field will not be configurable when you select this option.
Chapter 6 WirelessVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 716.2.3 Basic (802.1X)Use this screen to configure 802.1X encryption and authentication. Configure your RADIUS server information and WEP encryption settings. Use this security method if your wireless usernames and passwords are configured on a RADIUS server.In order to configure and enable WEP encryption, click N e t w o rk Se t t in g > W ir e le ss to display the Gener a l screen, then select Ba sic as the security level and 8 0 2 .1 X as the Security M ode .Figure 31 Wireless > General: Basic (802.1X) Password 1~4 The password (WEP keys) are used to encrypt data. Both the Device and the wireless stations must use the same password (WEP key) for data transmission.If you chose 6 4 - bit WEP, then enter any 5 ASCII characters or 10 hexadecimal characters ("0-9", "A-F").If you chose 1 2 8 - bit WEP, then enter 13 ASCII characters or 26 hexadecimal characters ("0-9", "A-F"). You must configure at least one password, only one password can be activated at any one time. more.../less Click m ore... to show more fields in this section. Click less to hide them.WEP Encryption Select 6 4 - b it s or 1 2 8 - b it s.This dictates the length of the security key that the network is going to use.Table 17 Wireless > General: Basic (WEP) (continued)LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 6 WirelessVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide72The following table describes the labels in this screen.Table 18 Wireless > General: Basic (802.1X)LABEL DESCRIPTIONSecurity Level Select Ba sic and 8 0 2 .1 X to enable 802.1X data encryption.Generate password automatically Select this option to have the Device automatically generate a password. The password field will not be configurable when you select this option.Password 1~4 The password (WEP key) is used to encrypt data. Both the Device and the wireless stations must use the same password (WEP key) for data transmission.If you chose 6 4 - bit WEP, then enter any 5 ASCII characters or 10 hexadecimal characters ("0-9", "A-F").If you chose 1 2 8 - bit WEP, then enter 13 ASCII characters or 26 hexadecimal characters ("0-9", "A-F"). You must configure at least one password, only one password can be activated at any one time. more.../less Click m ore... to show more fields in this section. Click less to hide them.WEP Encryption Select 6 4 - b it s or 1 2 8 - b it s.This dictates the length of the security key that the network is going to use.IP Address Enter the IP address of an external RADIUS server in dotted decimal notation.Port Number The default port of a RADIUS server for authentication is 1812. You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so.Shared Secret Specify a password (up to 32 alphanumeric characters) as the key to be shared between the external RADIUS server and the Device. This key is not sent over the network. This key must be the same on the external RADIUS server and the Device.
Chapter 6 WirelessVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 736.2.4 More Secure (WPA(2)-PSK)The WPA-PSK security mode provides both improved data encryption and user authentication over WEP. Using a Pre-Shared Key (PSK), both the Device and the connecting client share a common password in order to validate the connection. This type of encryption, while robust, is not as strong as WPA, WPA2 or even WPA2-PSK. The WPA2-PSK security mode is a newer, more robust version of the WPA encryption standard. It offers slightly better security, although the use of PSK makes it less robust than it could be. Click N et w ork Set t in g > W ir e le ss to display the Ge ne ral screen. Select M or e Se cure as the security level. Then select W PA- PSK or W PA2 - PSK from the Se curit y M ode list.Figure 32 Wireless > General: More Secure: WPA(2)-PSKThe following table describes the labels in this screen.Table 19 Wireless > General: More Secure: WPA(2)-PSKLABEL DESCRIPTIONSecurity Level Select Mor e Secure to enable WPA(2)-PSK data encryption.Security Mode Select W PA- PSK or W PA2 - PSK from the drop-down list box.Generate password automatically Select this option to have the Device automatically generate a password. The password field will not be configurable when you select this option.Password The encryption mechanisms used for WPA(2) and WPA(2)-PSK are the same. The only difference between the two is that WPA(2)-PSK uses a simple common password, instead of user-specific credentials.If you did not select Ge ne r a t e passw or d a ut om at ically, you can manually type a pre-shared key from 8 to 64 case-sensitive keyboard characters.more.../less Click m ore... to show more fields in this section. Click less to hide them.WPA-PSK CompatibleThis field appears when you choose W PA- PSK2 as the Securit y M ode.Check this field to allow wireless devices using W PA- PSK security mode to connect to your Device. The Device supports WPA-PSK and WPA2-PSK simultaneously.
Chapter 6 WirelessVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide746.2.5 WPA(2) AuthenticationThe WPA2 security mode is currently the most robust form of encryption for wireless networks. It requires a RADIUS server to authenticate user credentials and is a full implementation the security protocol. Use this security option for maximum protection of your network. However, it is the least backwards compatible with older devices.The WPA security mode is a security subset of WPA2. It requires the presence of a RADIUS server on your network in order to validate user credentials. This encryption standard is slightly older than WPA2 and therefore is more compatible with older devices.Click N et w ork Set t in g > W ir e le ss to display the Ge ne ral screen. Select M or e Se cure as the security level. Then select W PA or W PA2 from the Se cur it y Mode list.Figure 33 Wireless > General: More Secure: WPA(2)Encryption Select the encryption type (TKI P, AES or TKI P+ AES) for data encryption.Select TKI P if your wireless clients can all use TKIP.Select AES if your wireless clients can all use AES.Select TKI P+ AES to allow the wireless clients to use either TKIP or AES.Group Key Update TimerThe Grou p Ke y Updat e Tim er is the rate at which the RADIUS server sends a new group key out to all clients. Table 19 Wireless > General: More Secure: WPA(2)-PSK (continued)LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 6 WirelessVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 75The following table describes the labels in this screen.6.3 The More AP ScreenThis screen allows you to enable and configure multiple Basic Service Sets (BSSs) on the Device.Table 20 Wireless > General: More Secure: WPA(2)LABEL DESCRIPTIONSecurity Level Select Mor e Se cur e to enable WPA(2)-PSK data encryption.Security Mode Choose W PA or W PA2 from the drop-down list box.Authentication ServerIP Address Enter the IP address of the external authentication server in dotted decimal notation.Port Number Enter the port number of the external authentication server. The default port number is 1 8 1 2 . You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so with additional information. Shared Secret Enter a password (up to 31 alphanumeric characters) as the key to be shared between the external authentication server and the Device.The key must be the same on the external authentication server and your Device. The key is not sent over the network. more.../less Click m or e... to show more fields in this section. Click less to hide them.WPA CompatibleThis field is only available for WPA2. Select this if you want the Device to support WPA and WPA2 simultaneously.Encryption Select the encryption type (TKI P, AES or TKI P+ AES) for data encryption.Select TKI P if your wireless clients can all use TKIP.Select AES if your wireless clients can all use AES.Select TKI P+ AES to allow the wireless clients to use either TKIP or AES.WPA2 Pre-AuthenticationThis field is available only when you select W PA2 .Pre-authentication enables fast roaming by allowing the wireless client (already connecting to an AP) to perform IEEE 802.1x authentication with another AP before connecting to it. Select En able d to turn on preauthentication in WAP2. Otherwise, select Disabled.Network Re-auth IntervalSpecify how often wireless stations have to resend usernames and passwords in order to stay connected.If wireless station authentication is done using a RADIUS server, the reauthentication timer on the RADIUS server has priority.Group Key Update TimerThe Grou p Ke y Updat e Tim er is the rate at which the RADIUS server sends a new group key out to all clients.
Chapter 6 WirelessVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide76Click N et w or k Set t ing > W ir e le ss > M ore AP. The following screen displays.Figure 34 Network Setting > Wireless > More APThe following table describes the labels in this screen.Table 21 Network Setting > Wireless > More APLABEL DESCRIPTION# This is the index number of the entry. Status This field indicates whether this SSID is active. A yellow bulb signifies that this SSID is active. A gray bulb signifies that this SSID is not active.SSID An SSID profile is the set of parameters relating to one of the Device’s BSSs. The SSID (Service Set IDentifier) identifies the Service Set with which a wireless device is associated. This field displays the name of the wireless profile on the network. When a wireless client scans for an AP to associate with, this is the name that is broadcast and seen in the wireless client utility.Security This field indicates the security mode of the SSID profile.Guest WLAN This displays if the guest WLAN function has been enabled for this WLAN.If Hom e Gue st displays, clients can connect to each other directly.If Ex t e r na l Gue st displays, clients are blocked from connecting to each other directly.N / A displays if guest WLAN is disabled.Modify Click the Edit icon to configure the SSID profile.
Chapter 6 WirelessVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 776.3.1 Edit More AP Use this screen to edit an SSID profile. Click the Edit icon next to an SSID in the M ore AP screen. The following screen displays.Figure 35 More AP: EditThe following table describes the fields in this screen.Table 22 More AP: EditLABEL DESCRIPTIONWireless Network SetupWireless You can En a ble or D isa ble the wireless LAN in this field.Passphrase TypePassphrase type cannot be changed. The default is N on e .Wireless Network Settings
Chapter 6 WirelessVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide786.4 MAC Authentication This screen allows you to configure the ZyXEL Device to give exclusive access to specific devices ( Allow ) or exclude specific devices from accessing the ZyXEL Device ( De ny) . Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. You need to know the MAC addresses of the devices to configure this screen.Wireless Network Name (SSID)The SSID (Service Set IDentity) identifies the service set with which a wireless device is associated. Wireless devices associating to the access point (AP) must have the same SSID. Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 English keyboard characters) for the wireless LAN. Max clients Specify the maximum number of clients that can connect to this network at the same time.Hide SSID Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station cannot obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool.Enhanced Multicast Forwarding Select this check box to allow the Device to convert wireless multicast traffic into wireless unicast traffic.Guest WLAN Select this to create Guest WLANs for home and external clients. Select the WLAN type in the Access Scenario field.Access ScenarioIf you select Hom e Guest , clients can connect to each other directly.If you select Ext erna l Gue st , clients are blocked from connecting to each other directly.Maximum Upstream BandwidthSpecify the maximum rate for upstream wireless traffic to the WAN from this WLAN in kilobits per second (Kbps).Maximum Downstream BandwidthSpecify the maximum rate for downstream wireless traffic to this WLAN from the WAN in kilobits per second (Kbps).Security LevelSecurity Mode Select Ba sic ( W EP, 8 0 2 .1 X) or M ore Secur e ( W PA( 2 ) - PSK, W PA( 2 ) ) to add security on this wireless network. The wireless clients which want to associate to this network must have same wireless security settings as the Device. After you select to use a security, additional options appears in this screen. Or you can select No Secur it y to allow any client to associate this network without any data encryption or authentication.See Section 6.2.1 on page 69 for more details about this field.Apply Click Apply to save your changes.Cancel Click Cance l to exit this screen without saving.Table 22 More AP: Edit (continued)LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 6 WirelessVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 79Use this screen to view your Device’s MAC filter settings and add new MAC filter rules. Click N e t w or k Se t t ing > W ir e le ss > MAC Aut he nt ica t ion. The screen appears as shown.Figure 36 Wireless > MAC AuthenticationThe following table describes the labels in this screen.6.5 The WPS ScreenUse this screen to configure WiFi Protected Setup (WPS) on your Device.WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security, without having to configure security settings manually. Set up each WPS connection between two devices. Both devices must support WPS. See Section 6.10.9.3 on page 95 for more information about WPS.Table 23 Wireless > MAC AuthenticationLABEL DESCRIPTIONSSID Select the SSID for which you want to configure MAC filter settings.MAC Restrict Mode Define the filter action for the list of MAC addresses in the M AC Addr e ss table. Select D isa ble to turn off MAC filtering.Select D e ny to block access to the Device. MAC addresses not listed will be allowed to access the Device. Select Allow to permit access to the Device. MAC addresses not listed will be denied access to the Device. Add new MAC addressClick this if you want to add a new MAC address entry to the MAC filter list below.Enter the MAC addresses of the wireless devices that are allowed or denied access to the Device in these address fields. Enter the MAC addresses in a valid MAC address format, that is, six hexadecimal character pairs, for example, 12:34:56:78:9a:bc.#This is the index number of the entry.MAC Address This is the MAC addresses of the wireless devices that are allowed or denied access to the Device.Delete Click the De le t e icon to delete the entry.Apply Click Apply to save your changes.Cancel Click Cance l to exit this screen without saving.
Chapter 6 WirelessVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide80Note: The Device applies the security settings of the SSI D 1 profile (see Section 6.2 on page 66). If you want to use the WPS feature, make sure you have set the security mode of SSI D1 to W PA2 - PSK or N o Securit y.Click N e t w ork Set t in g > W ire le ss > W PS. The following screen displays. Select Ena ble and click Apply to activate the WPS function. Then you can configure the WPS settings in this screen. Figure 37 Network Setting > Wireless > WPSThe following table describes the labels in this screen.Table 24 Network Setting > Wireless > WPSLABEL DESCRIPTIONWPS Select Enable to activate WPS on the Device.WPS 2.0 Select En a ble to have the device use WPS 2.0 or Disable to have it use WPS 1.0.Method 1 Use this section to set up a WPS wireless network using Push Button Configuration (PBC).Connect Click this button to add another WPS-enabled wireless device (within wireless range of the Device) to your wireless network. This button may either be a physical button on the outside of device, or a menu button similar to the Con ne ct button on this screen.Note: You must press the other wireless device’s WPS button within two minutes of pressing this button.Method 2 Use this section to set up a WPS wireless network by entering the PIN of the client into the Device.Register Enter the PIN of the device that you are setting up a WPS connection with and click Re g ist e r to authenticate and add the wireless device to your wireless network.You can find the PIN either on the outside of the device, or by checking the device’s settings.Note: You must also activate WPS on that device within two minutes to have it present its PIN to the Device.
Chapter 6 WirelessVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 816.6 The WMM ScreenUse this screen to enable Wi-Fi MultiMedia (WMM) and WMM Power Save in wireless networks for multimedia applications.Click N et w or k Set t in g > W ire less > W MM . The following screen displays.Figure 38 Network Setting > Wireless > WMMThe following table describes the labels in this screen.Method 3 Use this section to set up a WPS wireless network by entering the PIN of the Device into the client.Release Configuration The default WPS status is configured.Click this button to remove all configured wireless and wireless security settings for WPS connections on the Device.Generate New PIN NumberThe PIN (Personal Identification Number) of the Device is shown here. Enter this PIN in the configuration utility of the device you want to connect to using WPS.The PIN is not necessary when you use WPS push-button method.Click the Gene r a t e N e w PI N N um ber button to have the Device create a new PIN. Apply Click Apply to save your changes.Cancel Click Ca nce l to restore your previously saved settings.Table 24 Network Setting > Wireless > WPS (continued)LABEL DESCRIPTIONTable 25 Network Setting > Wireless > WMMLABEL DESCRIPTIONWMM Select On to have the Device automatically give a service a priority level according to the ToS value in the IP header of packets it sends. WMM QoS (Wifi MultiMedia Quality of Service) gives high priority to voice and video, which makes them run more smoothly.WMM Automatic Power Save DeliverySelect this option to extend the battery life of your mobile devices (especially useful for small devices that are running multimedia applications). The Device goes to sleep mode to save power when it is not transmitting data. The AP buffers the packets sent to the Device until the Device "wakes up". The Device wakes up periodically to check for incoming data.Note: Note: This works only if the wireless device to which the Device is connected also supports this feature.Apply Click Apply to save your changes.Cancel Click Cance l to restore your previously saved settings.
Chapter 6 WirelessVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide826.7 The WDS ScreenAn AP using the Wireless Distribution System (WDS) can function as a wireless network bridge allowing you to wirelessly connect two wired network segments. The W DS screen allows you to configure the Device to connect to two or more APs wirelessly when WDS is enabled. Use this screen to set up your WDS (Wireless Distribution System) links between the Device and other wireless APs. You need to know the MAC address of the peer device. Once the security settings of peer sides match one another, the connection between devices is made. Note: WDS security is independent of the security settings between the Device and any wireless clients.Note: At the time of writing, WDS is compatible with other ZyXEL APs only. Not all models support WDS links. Check your other AP’s documentation.Click N et w or k Set t in g > W ire less > W DS. The following screen displays.Figure 39 Network Setting > Wireless > WDSThe following table describes the labels in this screen.Table 26 Network Setting > Wireless > WDSLABEL DESCRIPTIONWireless Bridge SetupAP Mode Select the operating mode for your Device.•Acce ss Poin t - The Device functions as a bridge and access point simultaneously. •W ireless Bridge - The Device acts as a wireless network bridge and establishes wireless links with other APs. In this mode, clients cannot connect to the Device wirelessly.Bridge Restrict This field is available only when you set operating mode to Acce ss Point .Select Ena bled to turn on WDS and enter the peer device’s MAC address manually in the table below. Select Disable to turn off WDS.
Chapter 6 WirelessVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 836.7.1 WDS ScanYou can click the Sca n icon in W ir eless > W D S to have the Device automatically search and display the available APs within range. Select an AP and click Apply to have the Device establish a wireless link with the selected wireless device. Figure 40 WDS: ScanThe following table describes the labels in this screen.Remote Bridge MAC AddressYou can enter the MAC address of the peer device by clicking the Edit icon under M odify. # This is the index number of the entry.MAC Address This shows the MAC address of the peer device. You can connect to up to 4 peer devices.Modify/Delete Click the Edit icon and type the MAC address of the peer device in a valid MAC address format (six hexadecimal character pairs, for example 12:34:56:78:9a:bc).Click the De le t e icon to remove this entry.Scan Click the Sca n icon to search and display the available APs within range.Apply Click Apply to save your changes.Cancel Click Cance l to restore your previously saved settings.Table 26 Network Setting > Wireless > WDS (continued)LABEL DESCRIPTIONTable 27 WDS: ScanLABEL DESCRIPTIONWireless Bridge Scan SetupRefresh Click Re fresh to update the table. # This is the index number of the entry.SSID This shows the SSID of the available wireless device within range.BSSID This shows the MAC address of the available wireless device within range.Apply Click Apply to save your changes.Cancel Click Can cel to restore your previously saved settings.
Chapter 6 WirelessVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide846.8 The Others ScreenUse this screen to configure advanced wireless settings. Click Net w ork Set t ing > W ir e le ss > Ot h er s. The screen appears as shown.See Section 6.10.2 on page 88 for detailed definitions of the terms listed in this screen.Figure 41 Network Setting > Wireless > OthersThe following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 28 Network Setting > Wireless > OthersLABEL DESCRIPTIONRTS/CTS ThresholdData with its frame size larger than this value will perform the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear To Send) handshake. Enter a value between 0 and 2347. Fragmentation ThresholdThis is the maximum data fragment size that can be sent. Enter a value between 256 and 2346. Auto Channel TimerIf you set the channel to Au t o in the N e t w or k Se t t ing > W ir ele ss > Ge nera l screen, specify the interval in minutes for how often the Device scans for the best channel. Enter 0 to disable the periodical scan.Output Power Set the output power of the Device. If there is a high density of APs in an area, decrease the output power to reduce interference with other APs. Select one of the following: 2 0 % , 4 0 % , 6 0 % , 8 0 % or 1 0 0 % . Beacon Interval When a wirelessly networked device sends a beacon, it includes with it a beacon interval. This specifies the time period before the device sends the beacon again.The interval tells receiving devices on the network how long they can wait in low power mode before waking up to handle the beacon. This value can be set from 50ms to 1000ms. A high value helps save current consumption of the access point.DTIM Interval Delivery Traffic Indication Message (DTIM) is the time period after which broadcast and multicast packets are transmitted to mobile clients in the Power Saving mode. A high DTIM value can cause clients to lose connectivity with the network. This value can be set from 1 to 255.
Chapter 6 WirelessVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 85802.11 Mode Select 8 0 2 .1 1 b Only to allow only IEEE 802.11b compliant WLAN devices to associate with the Device.Select 8 0 2 .1 1 g Only to allow only IEEE 802.11g compliant WLAN devices to associate with the Device.Select 8 0 2 .1 1 n Only to allow only IEEE 802.11n compliant WLAN devices to associate with the Device.Select 8 0 2 .1 1 b/ g M ix ed to allow either IEEE 802.11b or IEEE 802.11g compliant WLAN devices to associate with the Device. The transmission rate of your Device might be reduced.Select 8 0 2 .1 1 b/ g/ n M ixed to allow IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g or IEEE802.11n compliant WLAN devices to associate with the Device. The transmission rate of your Device might be reduced.802.11 ProtectionEnabling this feature can help prevent collisions in mixed-mode networks (networks with both IEEE 802.11b and IEEE 802.11g traffic).Select Auto to have the wireless devices transmit data after a RTS/CTS handshake. This helps improve IEEE 802.11g performance.Select Off to disable 802.11 protection. The transmission rate of your Device might be reduced in a mixed-mode network.This field displays Off and is not configurable when you set 8 0 2 .1 1 M ode to 8 0 2 .1 1 b On ly.Preamble Select a preamble type from the drop-down list box. Choices are Long or Sh or t . See Section 6.10.7 on page 92 for more information.This field is configurable only when you set 802.11 Mode to 8 0 2 .1 1 b.Apply Click Apply to save your changes.Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.Table 28 Network Setting > Wireless > Others (continued)LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 6 WirelessVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide866.9 The Channel Status ScreenUse the Channe l Sta t us screen to scan wireless LAN channel noises and view the results. Click N e t w or k Se t t ing > W ire le ss > Channel St a t us. The screen appears as shown. Click Sca n to scan the wireless LAN channels. You can view the results in the Cha n ne l Scan Re sult section.Figure 42 Network Setting > Wireless > Channel Status6.10 Technical ReferenceThis section discusses wireless LANs in depth.6.10.1 Wireless Network OverviewWireless networks consist of wireless clients, access points and bridges. • A wireless client is a radio connected to a user’s computer. • An access point is a radio with a wired connection to a network, which can connect with numerous wireless clients and let them access the network. • A bridge is a radio that relays communications between access points and wireless clients, extending a network’s range.
Chapter 6 WirelessVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 87Traditionally, a wireless network operates in one of two ways.• An “infrastructure” type of network has one or more access points and one or more wireless clients. The wireless clients connect to the access points.• An “ad-hoc” type of network is one in which there is no access point. Wireless clients connect to one another in order to exchange information.The following figure provides an example of a wireless network.Figure 43 Example of a Wireless NetworkThe wireless network is the part in the blue circle. In this wireless network, devices A and B use the access point (AP) to interact with the other devices (such as the printer) or with the Internet. Your Device is the AP.Every wireless network must follow these basic guidelines.• Every device in the same wireless network must use the same SSID.The SSID is the name of the wireless network. It stands for Service Set IDentifier.• If two wireless networks overlap, they should use a different channel.Like radio stations or television channels, each wireless network uses a specific channel, or frequency, to send and receive information.• Every device in the same wireless network must use security compatible with the AP.Security stops unauthorized devices from using the wireless network. It can also protect the information that is sent in the wireless network.
Chapter 6 WirelessVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide88Radio ChannelsIn the radio spectrum, there are certain frequency bands allocated for unlicensed, civilian use. For the purposes of wireless networking, these bands are divided into numerous channels. This allows a variety of networks to exist in the same place without interfering with one another. When you create a network, you must select a channel to use. Since the available unlicensed spectrum varies from one country to another, the number of available channels also varies. 6.10.2 Additional Wireless TermsThe following table describes some wireless network terms and acronyms used in the Device’s Web Configurator.6.10.3 Wireless Security OverviewBy their nature, radio communications are simple to intercept. For wireless data networks, this means that anyone within range of a wireless network without security can not only read the data passing over the airwaves, but also join the network. Once an unauthorized person has access to the network, he or she can steal information or introduce malware (malicious software) intended to compromise the network. For these reasons, a variety of security systems have been developed to ensure that only authorized people can use a wireless data network, or understand the data carried on it.These security standards do two things. First, they authenticate. This means that only people presenting the right credentials (often a username and password, or a “key” phrase) can access the network. Second, they encrypt. This means that the information sent over the air is encoded. Only people with the code key can understand the information, and only people who have been authenticated are given the code key.These security standards vary in effectiveness. Some can be broken, such as the old Wired Equivalent Protocol (WEP). Using WEP is better than using no security at all, but it will not keep a determined attacker out. Other security standards are secure in themselves but can be broken if a Table 29 Additional Wireless TermsTERM DESCRIPTIONRTS/CTS Threshold In a wireless network which covers a large area, wireless devices are sometimes not aware of each other’s presence. This may cause them to send information to the AP at the same time and result in information colliding and not getting through.By setting this value lower than the default value, the wireless devices must sometimes get permission to send information to the Device. The lower the value, the more often the devices must get permission.If this value is greater than the fragmentation threshold value (see below), then wireless devices never have to get permission to send information to the Device.Preamble A preamble affects the timing in your wireless network. There are two preamble modes: long and short. If a device uses a different preamble mode than the Device does, it cannot communicate with the Device.Authentication The process of verifying whether a wireless device is allowed to use the wireless network.Fragmentation ThresholdA small fragmentation threshold is recommended for busy networks, while a larger threshold provides faster performance if the network is not very busy.
Chapter 6 WirelessVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 89user does not use them properly. For example, the WPA-PSK security standard is very secure if you use a long key which is difficult for an attacker’s software to guess - for example, a twenty-letter long string of apparently random numbers and letters - but it is not very secure if you use a short key which is very easy to guess - for example, a three-letter word from the dictionary.Because of the damage that can be done by a malicious attacker, it’s not just people who have sensitive information on their network who should use security. Everybody who uses any wireless network should ensure that effective security is in place.A good way to come up with effective security keys, passwords and so on is to use obscure information that you personally will easily remember, and to enter it in a way that appears random and does not include real words. For example, if your mother owns a 1970 Dodge Challenger and her favorite movie is Vanishing Point (which you know was made in 1971) you could use “70dodchal71vanpoi” as your security key.The following sections introduce different types of wireless security you can set up in the wireless network.6.10.3.1 SSIDNormally, the Device acts like a beacon and regularly broadcasts the SSID in the area. You can hide the SSID instead, in which case the Device does not broadcast the SSID. In addition, you should change the default SSID to something that is difficult to guess.This type of security is fairly weak, however, because there are ways for unauthorized wireless devices to get the SSID. In addition, unauthorized wireless devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network.6.10.3.2 MAC Address FilterEvery device that can use a wireless network has a unique identification number, called a MAC address.1 A MAC address is usually written using twelve hexadecimal characters2; for example, 00A0C5000002 or 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. To get the MAC address for each device in the wireless network, see the device’s User’s Guide or other documentation.You can use the MAC address filter to tell the Device which devices are allowed or not allowed to use the wireless network. If a device is allowed to use the wireless network, it still has to have the correct information (SSID, channel, and security). If a device is not allowed to use the wireless network, it does not matter if it has the correct information.This type of security does not protect the information that is sent in the wireless network. Furthermore, there are ways for unauthorized wireless devices to get the MAC address of an authorized device. Then, they can use that MAC address to use the wireless network.6.10.3.3 User AuthenticationAuthentication is the process of verifying whether a wireless device is allowed to use the wireless network. You can make every user log in to the wireless network before using it. However, every device in the wireless network has to support IEEE 802.1x to do this.1. Some wireless devices, such as scanners, can detect wireless networks but cannot use wireless networks. These kinds of wireless devices might not have MAC addresses.2. Hexadecimal characters are 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, A, B, C, D, E, and F.
Chapter 6 WirelessVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide90For wireless networks, you can store the user names and passwords for each user in a RADIUS server. This is a server used in businesses more than in homes. If you do not have a RADIUS server, you cannot set up user names and passwords for your users.Unauthorized wireless devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network, even if they cannot use the wireless network. Furthermore, there are ways for unauthorized wireless users to get a valid user name and password. Then, they can use that user name and password to use the wireless network.6.10.3.4 EncryptionWireless networks can use encryption to protect the information that is sent in the wireless network. Encryption is like a secret code. If you do not know the secret code, you cannot understand the message.The types of encryption you can choose depend on the type of authentication. (See Section 6.10.3.3 on page 89 for information about this.)For example, if the wireless network has a RADIUS server, you can choose W PA or W PA2 . If users do not log in to the wireless network, you can choose no encryption, St a t ic W EP, W PA- PSK, or W PA2 - PSK.Usually, you should set up the strongest encryption that every device in the wireless network supports. For example, suppose you have a wireless network with the Device and you do not have a RADIUS server. Therefore, there is no authentication. Suppose the wireless network has two devices. Device A only supports WEP, and device B supports WEP and WPA. Therefore, you should set up St a t ic W EP in the wireless network.Note: It is recommended that wireless networks use W PA- PSK, W PA, or stronger encryption. The other types of encryption are better than none at all, but it is still possible for unauthorized wireless devices to figure out the original information pretty quickly.When you select W PA2 or W PA2 - PSK in your Device, you can also select an option (W PA com pat ible) to support WPA as well. In this case, if some of the devices support WPA and some support WPA2, you should set up W PA2 - PSK or W PA2 (depending on the type of wireless network login) and select the W PA com pa t ible option in the Device.Many types of encryption use a key to protect the information in the wireless network. The longer the key, the stronger the encryption. Every device in the wireless network must have the same key.Table 30 Types of Encryption for Each Type of AuthenticationNO AUTHENTICATION RADIUS SERVERW ea k est No Security WPAStatic WEPWPA-PSKSt r on ge st WPA2-PSK WPA2
Chapter 6 WirelessVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 916.10.4 Signal ProblemsBecause wireless networks are radio networks, their signals are subject to limitations of distance, interference and absorption.Problems with distance occur when the two radios are too far apart. Problems with interference occur when other radio waves interrupt the data signal. Interference may come from other radio transmissions, such as military or air traffic control communications, or from machines that are coincidental emitters such as electric motors or microwaves. Problems with absorption occur when physical objects (such as thick walls) are between the two radios, muffling the signal.6.10.5 BSSA Basic Service Set (BSS) exists when all communications between wireless stations or between a wireless station and a wired network client go through one access point (AP). Intra-BSS traffic is traffic between wireless stations in the BSS. When Intra-BSS traffic blocking is disabled, wireless station A and B can access the wired network and communicate with each other. When Intra-BSS traffic blocking is enabled, wireless station A and B can still access the wired network but cannot communicate with each other.Figure 44 Basic Service set6.10.6 MBSSIDTraditionally, you need to use different APs to configure different Basic Service Sets (BSSs). As well as the cost of buying extra APs, there is also the possibility of channel interference. The Device’s
Chapter 6 WirelessVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide92MBSSID (Multiple Basic Service Set IDentifier) function allows you to use one access point to provide several BSSs simultaneously. You can then assign varying QoS priorities and/or security modes to different SSIDs.Wireless devices can use different BSSIDs to associate with the same AP.6.10.6.1 Notes on Multiple BSSs• A maximum of eight BSSs are allowed on one AP simultaneously.• You must use different keys for different BSSs. If two wireless devices have different BSSIDs (they are in different BSSs), but have the same keys, they may hear each other’s communications (but not communicate with each other).• MBSSID should not replace but rather be used in conjunction with 802.1x security.6.10.7 Preamble TypePreamble is used to signal that data is coming to the receiver. Short and long refer to the length of the synchronization field in a packet.Short preamble increases performance as less time sending preamble means more time for sending data. All IEEE 802.11 compliant wireless adapters support long preamble, but not all support short preamble. Use long preamble if you are unsure what preamble mode other wireless devices on the network support, and to provide more reliable communications in busy wireless networks. Use short preamble if you are sure all wireless devices on the network support it, and to provide more efficient communications.Use the dynamic setting to automatically use short preamble when all wireless devices on the network support it, otherwise the Device uses long preamble.Note: The wireless devices MUST use the same preamble mode in order to communicate.6.10.8 Wireless Distribution System (WDS)The Device can act as a wireless network bridge and establish WDS (Wireless Distribution System) links with other APs. You need to know the MAC addresses of the APs you want to link to. Once the security settings of peer sides match one another, the connection between devices is made.At the time of writing, WDS security is compatible with other ZyXEL access points only. Refer to your other access point’s documentation for details.The following figure illustrates how WDS link works between APs. Notebook computer A is a wireless client connecting to access point AP 1 . AP 1 has no wired Internet connection, but it can
Chapter 6 WirelessVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 93establish a WDS link with access point AP 2 , which has a wired Internet connection. When AP 1 has a WDS link with AP 2 , the notebook computer can access the Internet through AP 2 .Figure 45 WDS Link Example6.10.9 WiFi Protected Setup (WPS)Your Device supports WiFi Protected Setup (WPS), which is an easy way to set up a secure wireless network. WPS is an industry standard specification, defined by the WiFi Alliance.WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security, without having to configure security settings manually. Each WPS connection works between two devices. Both devices must support WPS (check each device’s documentation to make sure). Depending on the devices you have, you can either press a button (on the device itself, or in its configuration utility) or enter a PIN (a unique Personal Identification Number that allows one device to authenticate the other) in each of the two devices. When WPS is activated on a device, it has two minutes to find another device that also has WPS activated. Then, the two devices connect and set up a secure network by themselves.6.10.9.1 Push Button ConfigurationWPS Push Button Configuration (PBC) is initiated by pressing a button on each WPS-enabled device, and allowing them to connect automatically. You do not need to enter any information. Not every WPS-enabled device has a physical WPS button. Some may have a WPS PBC button in their configuration utilities instead of or in addition to the physical button.Take the following steps to set up WPS using the button.1Ensure that the two devices you want to set up are within wireless range of one another. 2Look for a WPS button on each device. If the device does not have one, log into its configuration utility and locate the button (see the device’s User’s Guide for how to do this - for the Device, see Section 6.6 on page 81).3Press the button on one of the devices (it doesn’t matter which). For the Device you must press the WPS button for more than three seconds.4Within two minutes, press the button on the other device. The registrar sends the network name (SSID) and security key through an secure connection to the enrollee.If you need to make sure that WPS worked, check the list of associated wireless clients in the AP’s configuration utility. If you see the wireless client in the list, WPS was successful.WDSAP 2AP 1A
Chapter 6 WirelessVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide946.10.9.2 PIN ConfigurationEach WPS-enabled device has its own PIN (Personal Identification Number). This may either be static (it cannot be changed) or dynamic (in some devices you can generate a new PIN by clicking on a button in the configuration interface). Use the PIN method instead of the push-button configuration (PBC) method if you want to ensure that the connection is established between the devices you specify, not just the first two devices to activate WPS in range of each other. However, you need to log into the configuration interfaces of both devices to use the PIN method.When you use the PIN method, you must enter the PIN from one device (usually the wireless client) into the second device (usually the Access Point or wireless router). Then, when WPS is activated on the first device, it presents its PIN to the second device. If the PIN matches, one device sends the network and security information to the other, allowing it to join the network.Take the following steps to set up a WPS connection between an access point or wireless router (referred to here as the AP) and a client device using the PIN method.1Ensure WPS is enabled on both devices.2Access the WPS section of the AP’s configuration interface. See the device’s User’s Guide for how to do this. 3Look for the client’s WPS PIN; it will be displayed either on the device, or in the WPS section of the client’s configuration interface (see the device’s User’s Guide for how to find the WPS PIN - for the Device, see Section 6.5 on page 79).4Enter the client’s PIN in the AP’s configuration interface.5If the client device’s configuration interface has an area for entering another device’s PIN, you can either enter the client’s PIN in the AP, or enter the AP’s PIN in the client - it does not matter which. 6Start WPS on both devices within two minutes. 7Use the configuration utility to activate WPS, not the push-button on the device itself.8On a computer connected to the wireless client, try to connect to the Internet. If you can connect, WPS was successful.If you cannot connect, check the list of associated wireless clients in the AP’s configuration utility. If you see the wireless client in the list, WPS was successful.
Chapter 6 WirelessVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 95The following figure shows a WPS-enabled wireless client (installed in a notebook computer) connecting to the WPS-enabled AP via the PIN method.Figure 46 Example WPS Process: PIN Method6.10.9.3 How WPS WorksWhen two WPS-enabled devices connect, each device must assume a specific role. One device acts as the registrar (the device that supplies network and security settings) and the other device acts as the enrollee (the device that receives network and security settings. The registrar creates a secure EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) tunnel and sends the network name (SSID) and the WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK pre-shared key to the enrollee. Whether WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK is used depends on the standards supported by the devices. If the registrar is already part of a network, it sends the existing information. If not, it generates the SSID and WPA(2)-PSK randomly.ENROLLEESECURE EAP TUNNELSSIDWPA(2)-PSKWITHIN 2 MINUTESCOMMUNICATIONThis device’s WPSEnter WPS PIN WPSfrom other device: WPS PIN: 123456WPSSTARTWPSSTARTREGISTRAR
Chapter 6 WirelessVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide96The following figure shows a WPS-enabled client (installed in a notebook computer) connecting to a WPS-enabled access point.Figure 47 How WPS worksThe roles of registrar and enrollee last only as long as the WPS setup process is active (two minutes). The next time you use WPS, a different device can be the registrar if necessary.The WPS connection process is like a handshake; only two devices participate in each WPS transaction. If you want to add more devices you should repeat the process with one of the existing networked devices and the new device.Note that the access point (AP) is not always the registrar, and the wireless client is not always the enrollee. All WPS-certified APs can be a registrar, and so can some WPS-enabled wireless clients.By default, a WPS devices is “unconfigured”. This means that it is not part of an existing network and can act as either enrollee or registrar (if it supports both functions). If the registrar is unconfigured, the security settings it transmits to the enrollee are randomly-generated. Once a WPS-enabled device has connected to another device using WPS, it becomes “configured”. A configured wireless client can still act as enrollee or registrar in subsequent WPS connections, but a configured access point can no longer act as enrollee. It will be the registrar in all subsequent WPS connections in which it is involved. If you want a configured AP to act as an enrollee, you must reset it to its factory defaults.6.10.9.4 Example WPS Network SetupThis section shows how security settings are distributed in an example WPS setup.The following figure shows an example network. In step 1, both AP1 and Clie nt 1 are unconfigured. When WPS is activated on both, they perform the handshake. In this example, AP1 SECURE TUNNELSECURITY INFOWITHIN 2 MINUTESCOMMUNICATIONACTIVATEWPSACTIVATEWPSWPS HANDSHAKEREGISTRARENROLLEE
Chapter 6 WirelessVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 97is the registrar, and Client 1 is the enrollee. The registrar randomly generates the security information to set up the network, since it is unconfigured and has no existing information.Figure 48 WPS: Example Network Step 1In step 2 , you add another wireless client to the network. You know that Client 1 supports registrar mode, but it is better to use AP1 for the WPS handshake with the new client since you must connect to the access point anyway in order to use the network. In this case, AP1 must be the registrar, since it is configured (it already has security information for the network). AP1 supplies the existing security information to Client 2 .Figure 49 WPS: Example Network Step 2REGISTRARENROLLEESECURITY INFOCLIENT 1 AP1REGISTRARCLIENT 1 AP1ENROLLEECLIENT 2EXISTING CONNECTIONSECURITY INFO
Chapter 6 WirelessVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide98In step 3, you add another access point (AP2 ) to your network. AP2 is out of range of AP1 , so you cannot use AP1 for the WPS handshake with the new access point. However, you know that Clie n t 2 supports the registrar function, so you use it to perform the WPS handshake instead.Figure 50 WPS: Example Network Step 36.10.9.5 Limitations of WPSWPS has some limitations of which you should be aware. • WPS works in Infrastructure networks only (where an AP and a wireless client communicate). It does not work in Ad-Hoc networks (where there is no AP).• When you use WPS, it works between two devices only. You cannot enroll multiple devices simultaneously, you must enroll one after the other. For instance, if you have two enrollees and one registrar you must set up the first enrollee (by pressing the WPS button on the registrar and the first enrollee, for example), then check that it successfully enrolled, then set up the second device in the same way.• WPS works only with other WPS-enabled devices. However, you can still add non-WPS devices to a network you already set up using WPS. WPS works by automatically issuing a randomly-generated WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK pre-shared key from the registrar device to the enrollee devices. Whether the network uses WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK depends on the device. You can check the configuration interface of the registrar device to discover the key the network is using (if the device supports this feature). Then, you can enter the key into the non-WPS device and join the network as normal (the non-WPS device must also support WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK).CLIENT 1 AP1REGISTRARCLIENT 2EXISTING CONNECTIONSECURITY INFOENROLLEEAP2EXISTING CONNECTION
Chapter 6 WirelessVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 99• When you use the PBC method, there is a short period (from the moment you press the button on one device to the moment you press the button on the other device) when any WPS-enabled device could join the network. This is because the registrar has no way of identifying the “correct” enrollee, and cannot differentiate between your enrollee and a rogue device. This is a possible way for a hacker to gain access to a network.You can easily check to see if this has happened. WPS works between only two devices simultaneously, so if another device has enrolled your device will be unable to enroll, and will not have access to the network. If this happens, open the access point’s configuration interface and look at the list of associated clients (usually displayed by MAC address). It does not matter if the access point is the WPS registrar, the enrollee, or was not involved in the WPS handshake; a rogue device must still associate with the access point to gain access to the network. Check the MAC addresses of your wireless clients (usually printed on a label on the bottom of the device). If there is an unknown MAC address you can remove it or reset the AP.
Chapter 6 WirelessVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide100
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 101CHAPTER 7Home Networking7.1 OverviewA Local Area Network (LAN) is a shared communication system to which many networking devices are connected. It is usually located in one immediate area such as a building or floor of a building.Use the LAN screens to help you configure a LAN DHCP server and manage IP addresses.7.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter•Use the LAN Set up screen to set the LAN IP address, subnet mask, and DHCP settings of your Device (Section 7.2 on page 103).•Use the Stat ic DH CP screen to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers based on their MAC Addresses (Section 7.3 on page 107). •Use the UPnP screen to enable UPnP and UPnP NAT traversal on the Device (Section 7.4 on page 108).•Use the Addit iona l Subnet screen to configure IP alias and public static IP (Section 7.5 on page 109).•Use the STB Vendor I D screen to have the Device automatically create static DHCP entries for Set Top Box (STB) devices when they request IP addresses (Section 7.8 on page 119)•Use the LAN VLAN screen to control the VLAN ID and IEEE 802.1p priority tags of traffic sent out through individual LAN ports (Section 7.9 on page 120).DSLLAN
Chapter 7 Home NetworkingVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide1027.1.2 What You Need To Know7.1.2.1 About LANIP AddressIP addresses identify individual devices on a network. Every networking device (including computers, servers, routers, printers, etc.) needs an IP address to communicate across the network. These networking devices are also known as hosts.Subnet MaskSubnet masks determine the maximum number of possible hosts on a network. You can also use subnet masks to divide one network into multiple sub-networks.DHCPA DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server can assign your Device an IP address, subnet mask, DNS and other routing information when it's turned on.DNSDNS (Domain Name System) is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a networking device before you can access it.RADVD (Router Advertisement Daemon)When an IPv6 host sends a Router Solicitation (RS) request to discover the available routers, RADVD with Router Advertisement (RA) messages in response to the request. It specifies the minimum and maximum intervals of RA broadcasts. RA messages containing the address prefix. IPv6 hosts can be generated with the IPv6 prefix an IPv6 address.7.1.2.2 About UPnPIdentifying UPnP DevicesUPnP hardware is identified as an icon in the Network Connections folder (Windows XP). Each UPnP compatible device installed on your network will appear as a separate icon. Selecting the icon of a UPnP device will allow you to access the information and properties of that device. NAT TraversalUPnP NAT traversal automates the process of allowing an application to operate through NAT. UPnP network devices can automatically configure network addressing, announce their presence in the network to other UPnP devices and enable exchange of simple product and service descriptions. NAT traversal allows the following:• Dynamic port mapping• Learning public IP addresses
Chapter 7 Home NetworkingVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 103• Assigning lease times to mappingsWindows Messenger is an example of an application that supports NAT traversal and UPnP. See the Chapter 10 on page 149 for more information on NAT.Cautions with UPnPThe automated nature of NAT traversal applications in establishing their own services and opening firewall ports may present network security issues. Network information and configuration may also be obtained and modified by users in some network environments. When a UPnP device joins a network, it announces its presence with a multicast message. For security reasons, the Device allows multicast messages on the LAN only.All UPnP-enabled devices may communicate freely with each other without additional configuration. Disable UPnP if this is not your intention. UPnP and ZyXELZyXEL has achieved UPnP certification from the Universal Plug and Play Forum UPnP™ Implementers Corp. (UIC). ZyXEL's UPnP implementation supports Internet Gateway Device (IGD) 1.0. See Section 7.5 on page 109 for examples of installing and using UPnP.Finding Out MoreSee Section 7.10 on page 120 for technical background information on LANs.7.1.3 Before You BeginFind out the MAC addresses of your network devices if you intend to add them to the DHCP Client List screen.7.2 The LAN Setup ScreenUse this screen to set the Local Area Network IP address and subnet mask of your Device. Click N e t w or k Se t t ing > H om e N e t w or k ing to open the LAN Se t up screen. Follow these steps to configure your LAN settings.1Enter an IP address into the I P Address field. The IP address must be in dotted decimal notation. This will become the IP address of your Device.2Enter the IP subnet mask into the I P Subnet M a sk field. Unless instructed otherwise it is best to leave this alone, the configurator will automatically compute a subnet mask based upon the IP address you entered.
Chapter 7 Home NetworkingVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide1043Click Apply to save your settings.Figure 51 Network Setting > Home Networking > LAN SetupThe following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 31 Network Setting > Home Networking > LAN SetupLABEL DESCRIPTIONInterface GroupGroup Name Select the interface group name for which you want to configure LAN settings. See Chapter 12 on page 171 for how to create a new interface group.LAN IP SetupIP Address Enter the LAN IP address you want to assign to your Device in dotted decimal notation, for example, 192.168.1.1 (factory default). Subnet Mask Type the subnet mask of your network in dotted decimal notation, for example 255.255.255.0 (factory default). Your Device automatically computes the subnet mask based on the IP Address you enter, so do not change this field unless you are instructed to do so.IGMP SnoopingStatus Select the En able I GMP Snooping check box to allows the Device to passively learn multicast group.
Chapter 7 Home NetworkingVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 105IGMP Mode Select St an da r d Mode to have the Device forward multicast packets to a port that joins the multicast group and broadcast unknown multicast packets from the WAN to all LAN ports.Select Blocking M ode to have the Device block all unknown multicast packets from the WAN.DHCP Server StateDHCP Select Enable to have the Device act as a DHCP server or DHCP relay agent. Select Disable to stop the DHCP server on the Device. Select DH CP Re la y to have the Device forward DHCP request to the DHCP server. DHCP Relay Server AddressThis field is only available when you select DHCP Relay in the D H CP field. IP Address Enter the IP address of the actual remote DHCP server in this field.IP Addressing ValuesThis field is only available when you select En able in the DH CP field. Beginning IP AddressThis field specifies the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool.Ending IP AddressThis field specifies the last of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool.DHCP Server Lease TimeThis is the period of time DHCP-assigned addresses is used. DHCP automatically assigns IP addresses to clients when they log in. DHCP centralizes IP address management on central computers that run the DHCP server program. DHCP leases addresses, for a period of time, which means that past addresses are “recycled” and made available for future reassignment to other systems.This field is only available when you select En able in the DH CP field. Days/Hours/MinutesEnter the lease time of the DHCP server.DNS Values This field is only available when you select Ena ble in the D H CP field. DNS Specify which DNS server addresses the Device sends to LAN DHCP clients.Select Dyna m ic to have the DHCP clients use the Device’s LAN IP address as the DNS server address so the Device acts as a proxy for DNS queries. Select St a t ic to manually enter DNS server addresses. Select Obt ained from I SP to use the DNS server IP addresses the Device’s WAN connection uses.DNS Server 1DNS Server 2Enter the first and second DNS (Domain Name System) server IP address the Device passes to the DHCP clients. LAN IPv6 Mode SetupIPv6 State Select En a ble to activate the IPv6 mode and configure IPv6 settings on the Device.LAN IPv6 Address SetupDelegate prefix from WANSelect this option to automatically obtain an IPv6 network prefix from the service provider or an uplink router.Static Select this option to configure a fixed IPv6 address for the Device’s LAN IPv6 address.ULA Pseudo-Random Global ID A unique local address (ULA) is a unique IPv6 address for use in private networks but not routable in the global IPv6 Internet.Select this to have the Device automatically generate a globally unique address for the LAN IPv6 address. The address format is like fdxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx::/64.ULA IPv6 Address SetupTable 31 Network Setting > Home Networking > LAN Setup (continued)LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 7 Home NetworkingVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide106IPv6 Address If you select static IPv6 address, enter the IPv6 address prefix that the Device uses for the LAN IPv6 address.Prefix Length If you select static IPv6 address, enter the IPv6 prefix length that the Device uses to generate the LAN IPv6 address.An IPv6 prefix length specifies how many most significant bits (starting from the left) in the address compose the network address. This field displays the bit number of the IPv6 subnet mask.MLD Snooping Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) allows an IPv6 switch or router to discover the presence of MLD hosts who wish to receive multicast packets and the IP addresses of multicast groups the hosts want to join on its network. Select Ena ble M LD Snooping to activate MLD snooping on the Device. This allows the Device to check MLD packets passing through it and learn the multicast group membership. It helps reduce multicast traffic.MLD Mode Select St a ndar d M ode to have the Device forward IPv6 multicast packets to a port that joins the IPv6 multicast group and broadcast unknown IPv6 multicast packets from the WAN to all LAN ports.Select Blocking M ode to have the Device block all unknown IPv6 multicast packets from the WAN.LAN IPv6 Address Assign SetupSelect how you want to obtain an IPv6 address: •sta t e less + DN S send by RADVD : The Device uses IPv6 stateless autoconfiguration. RADVD (Router Advertisement Daemon) is enabled to have the Device send IPv6 prefix information in router advertisements periodically and in response to router solicitations. DHCPv6 server is disabled. (See page 102 for more information on RADVD.)•sta t e less + DN S sen d by DHCPv6 : The Device uses IPv6 stateless autoconfiguration. The DNS is provided by a DHCPv6 server.•sta t e fu l + D H CPv6 ser ve r : The Device uses IPv6 stateful autoconfiguration. The DHCPv6 server is enabled to have the Device act as a DHCPv6 server and pass IPv6 addresses, DNS server and domain name information to DHCPv6 clients.•sta t e fu l + DHCPv6 re la y: The Device uses IPv6 stateful autoconfiguration. DH CPv 6 Rela y is enabled to have the Device relay client DHCPv6 requests. DHCPv6 ConfigurationDHCPv6 State This shows the status of the DHCPv6. IPv6 DNS ValuesIPv6 DNS Server 1-3Select From I SP if your ISP dynamically assigns IPv6 DNS server information.Select User - De fine d if you have the IPv6 address of a DNS server. Enter the DNS server IPv6 addresses the Device passes to the DHCP clients.Select N on e if you do not want to configure IPv6 DNS servers.IPv6 Address ValuesIPv6 Start AddressIf DHCPv6 is enabled, specify the first IPv6 address in the pool of addresses that can be assigned to DHCPv6 clients. IPv6 End AddressIf DHCPv6 is enabled, specify the last IPv6 address in the pool of addresses that can be assigned to DHCPv6 clients. IPv6 Domain Name If DHCPv6 is enabled, specify the domain name to be assigned to DHCPv6 clients.IPv6 Router Advertisement StateRADVD State This shows the status of RADVD.Apply Click Apply to save your changes.Cancel Click Cance l to restore your previously saved settings.Table 31 Network Setting > Home Networking > LAN Setup (continued)LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 7 Home NetworkingVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 1077.3 The Static DHCP ScreenThis table allows you to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers based on their MAC Addresses. Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02.Use this screen to change your Device’s static DHCP settings. Click Net w ork Set t in g > Hom e N e t w or k in g > St a t ic DH CP to open the following screen.Figure 52 Network Setting > Home Networking > Static DHCP The following table describes the labels in this screen.If you click Add new st a t ic lea se in the Stat ic DHCP screen or the Edit icon next to a static DHCP entry, the following screen displays.Figure 53 Static DHCP: Add/EditTable 32 Network Setting > Home Networking > Static DHCPLABEL DESCRIPTIONAdd new static leaseClick this to add a new static DHCP entry. # This is the index number of the entry.Status This field displays whether the client is connected to the Device.MAC Address The MAC (Media Access Control) or Ethernet address on a LAN (Local Area Network) is unique to your computer (six pairs of hexadecimal notation).A network interface card such as an Ethernet adapter has a hardwired address that is assigned at the factory. This address follows an industry standard that ensures no other adapter has a similar address.IP Address This field displays the IP address relative to the # field listed above.Modify/Delete Click the Edit icon to have the IP address field editable and change it.Click the D e le t e icon to delete a static DHCP entry. A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the selected entry.
Chapter 7 Home NetworkingVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide108The following table describes the labels in this screen.7.4 The UPnP ScreenUniversal Plug and Play (UPnP) is a distributed, open networking standard that uses TCP/IP for simple peer-to-peer network connectivity between devices. A UPnP device can dynamically join a network, obtain an IP address, convey its capabilities and learn about other devices on the network. In turn, a device can leave a network smoothly and automatically when it is no longer in use.See page 102 for more information on UPnP.Use the following screen to configure the UPnP settings on your Device. Click N et w or k Set t ing > Hom e N e t w ork in g > UPnP to display the screen shown next.Figure 54 Network Setting > Home Networking > UPnPTable 33 Static DHCP: Add/EditLABEL DESCRIPTIONActive Select this to activate the connection between the client and the Device.Group Name Select the interface group name for which you want to configure static DHCP settings. See Chapter 12 on page 171 for how to create a new interface group.Select Device Info If you select Ma nual I n put , you can manually type in the MAC address and IP address of a computer on your LAN. You can also choose the name of a computer from the drop list and have the MAC Address and IP address auto-detected.MAC Address If you select M anu a l I npu t , enter the MAC address of a computer on your LAN.IP Address If you select Manual I n put , enter the IP address that you want to assign to the computer on your LAN with the MAC address that you will also specify.Apply Click Apply to save your changes.Cancel Click Cance l to exit this screen without saving.
Chapter 7 Home NetworkingVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 109The following table describes the labels in this screen.7.5 Installing UPnP in Windows ExampleThis section shows how to install UPnP in Windows Me and Windows XP. Installing UPnP in Windows MeFollow the steps below to install the UPnP in Windows Me. 1Click St a r t and Cont rol Pa ne l. Double-click Add/ Re m ove Pr ogr a m s.Table 34 Network Setting > Home Networking > UPnPLABEL DESCRIPTIONUPnP Select En able to activate UPnP. Be aware that anyone could use a UPnP application to open the web configurator's login screen without entering the Device's IP address (although you must still enter the password to access the web configurator).UPnP NAT-T Select Ena ble to allow UPnP-enabled applications to automatically configure the Device so that they can communicate through the Device by using NAT traversal. UPnP applications automatically reserve a NAT forwarding port in order to communicate with another UPnP enabled device; this eliminates the need to manually configure port forwarding for the UPnP enabled application. The table below displays the NAT port forwarding rules added automatically by UPnP NAT-T.# This is the index number of the UPnP NAT-T connection.Description This is the description of the UPnP NAT-T connection.IP Address This is the IP address of the other connected UPnP enabled device.External Port This is the external port number that identifies the service.Internal Port This is the internal port number that identifies the service.Apply Click Apply to save your changes.Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Chapter 7 Home NetworkingVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide1102Click on the W indow s Se t up tab and select Com m u nica t ion in the Com pone n t s selection box. Click D e t a ils. Add/Remove Programs: Windows Setup: Communication 3In the Com m unicat ion s window, select the Un iversa l Plug a n d Pla y check box in the Com pon e nt s selection box. Add/Remove Programs: Windows Setup: Communication: Components
Chapter 7 Home NetworkingVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 1114Click OK to go back to the Add/ Rem ove Pr ogr a m s Prope rt ie s window and click N e x t. 5Restart the computer when prompted. Installing UPnP in Windows XPFollow the steps below to install the UPnP in Windows XP.1Click St a r t and Con t r ol Panel. 2Double-click N e t w ork Con n e ctions.3In the N et w or k Connect ions window, click Adva nced in the main menu and select Opt ion a l N e t w or k in g Com ponent s …. Network Co nnections4The W indow s Opt iona l N e t w ork ing Com ponent s W izar d window displays. Select N et w or king Service in the Com pon e n t s selection box and click D et a ils. Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard
Chapter 7 Home NetworkingVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide1125In the N et w ork ing Ser vices window, select the Un ive r sa l Plu g and Play check box. Networking Services6Click OK to go back to the W indow s Opt iona l N e t w ork in g Com pon e nt W iza r d window and click N e x t . 7.6 Using UPnP in Windows XP ExampleThis section shows you how to use the UPnP feature in Windows XP. You must already have UPnP installed in Windows XP and UPnP activated on the Device.Make sure the computer is connected to a LAN port of the Device. Turn on your computer and the Device. Auto-discover Your UPnP-enabled Network Device1Click St a r t and Con t r ol Panel. Double-click N et w ork Connect ions. An icon displays under Internet Gateway.
Chapter 7 Home NetworkingVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 1132Right-click the icon and select Pr op er t ie s. Network Co nnections3In the I nt e r n e t Conne ct ion Prope rt ie s window, click Se t t ings to see the port mappings there were automatically created. Internet Connec tion Properties
Chapter 7 Home NetworkingVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide1144You may edit or delete the port mappings or click Add to manually add port mappings. Internet Connection Properties: Advanced SettingsInternet Connec tion Properties: Advan ced Settings: Add5When the UPnP-enabled device is disconnected from your computer, all port mappings will be deleted automatically.6Select Show icon in not ificat ion are a w hen connect e d option and click OK. An icon displays in the system tray. System Tray Icon
Chapter 7 Home NetworkingVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 1157Double-click on the icon to display your current Internet connection status.Internet Conn ection StatusWeb Configurator Easy AccessWith UPnP, you can access the web-based configurator on the Device without finding out the IP address of the Device first. This comes helpful if you do not know the IP address of the Device.Follow the steps below to access the web configurator.1Click St a r t and then Con t r ol Pa ne l. 2Double-click N e t w ork Con n e ctions.
Chapter 7 Home NetworkingVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide1163Select M y N et w or k Pla ce s under Ot her Pla ces. Network Co nnections4An icon with the description for each UPnP-enabled device displays under Loca l N e t w or k . 5Right-click on the icon for your Device and select I n vok e . The web configurator login screen displays. Network Co nnections: My Netw ork Places
Chapter 7 Home NetworkingVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 1176Right-click on the icon for your Device and select Pr op er t ie s. A properties window displays with basic information about the Device. Network Co nnections: My Netw ork Places: Proper ties: Example
Chapter 7 Home NetworkingVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide1187.7 The Additional Subnet ScreenUse the Addit iona l Subne t screen to configure IP alias and public static IP. IP alias allows you to partition a physical network into different logical networks over the same Ethernet interface. The Device supports multiple logical LAN interfaces via its physical Ethernet interface with the Device itself as the gateway for the LAN network. When you use IP alias, you can also configure firewall rules to control access to the LAN's logical network (subnet).If your ISP provides the Public LAN service, the Device may use an LAN IP address that can be accessed from the WAN. Click N et w ork Set t in g > H om e N et w or k in g > Addit ion a l Subn e t to display the screen shown next.Figure 55 Network Setting > Home Networking > Additional SubnetThe following table describes the labels in this screen.Table 35 Network Setting > Home Networking > Additional SubnetLABEL DESCRIPTIONIP Alias SetupGroup Name Select the interface group name for which you want to configure the IP alias settings. See Chapter 12 on page 171 for how to create a new interface group.Active Select the check box to configure a LAN network for the Device.IP Address Enter the IP address of your Device in dotted decimal notation. IP Subnet Mask Your Device will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP address that you assign. Unless you are implementing subnetting, use the subnet mask computed by the Device.Public LANActive Select the checkbox to enable the Public LAN feature. Your ISP must support Public LAN and Static IP. IP Address Enter the public IP address provided by your ISP.IP Subnet Mask Enter the public IP subnet mask provided by your ISP.
Chapter 7 Home NetworkingVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 1197.8 The STB Vendor ID ScreenSet Top Box (STB) devices with dynamic IP addresses sometimes don’t renew their IP addresses before the lease time expires. This could lead to IP address conflicts if the STB continues to use an IP address that gets assigned to another device. Use this screen to list the Vendor IDs of connected STBs to have the Device automatically create static DHCP entries for them when they request IP addresses.Click N et w ork Set t in g > H om e N e t w ork ing > STB V e n dor I D to open this screen. Figure 56 Network Setting > Home Networking > STB Vendor IDThe following table describes the labels in this screen.Offer Public IP by DHCPSelect the check box to enable the Device to provide public IP addresses by DHCP server.Enable ARP ProxySelect the check box to enable the ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) proxy.Apply Click Apply to save your changes.Cancel Click Cance l to exit this screen without saving.Table 35 Network Setting > Home Networking > Additional Subnet (continued)LABEL DESCRIPTIONTable 36 Network Setting > Home Networking > STB Vendor IDLABEL DESCRIPTIONVendor ID 1 ~ 5Enter the STB’s vendor ID.Apply Click Apply to save your changes.Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Chapter 7 Home NetworkingVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide1207.9 The LAN VLAN ScreenClick Ne t w or k Set t ing > Hom e N et w or k ing > LAN V LAN to open this screen. Use this screen to control the VLAN ID and IEEE 802.1p priority tags of traffic sent out through individual LAN ports. Figure 57 Network Setting > Home Networking > LAN VLANThe following table describes the labels in this screen.7.10 Technical ReferenceThis section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this chapter.Table 37 Network Setting > Home Networking > LAN VLANLABEL DESCRIPTIONLan Port These represent the Device’s LAN ports.Tag Operation Select what you want the Device to do to the IEEE 802.1q VLAN ID and priority tags of downstream traffic before sending it out through this LAN port.•Unchan ge - Don’t do anything to the traffic’s VLAN ID and priority tags.•Add - Add VLAN ID and priority tags to untagged traffic.•Re m ove - Delete one tag from tagged traffic. If the frame has double tags, this removes the outer tag. This does not affect untagged traffic.•Re m a rk - Change the value of the outer VLAN ID and priority tags.802.1P Mark Use this option to set what to do for the IEEE 802.1p priority tags when you add or remark the tags for a LAN port’s downstream traffic. Either select Uncha n ge to not modify the traffic’s priority tags or select an priority from 0 to 7 to use. The larger the number, the higher the priority.VLAN ID If you will add or remark tags for this LAN port’s downstream traffic, specify the VLAN ID (from 0 to 4094) to use here.Apply Click Apply to save your changes.Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Chapter 7 Home NetworkingVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 1217.10.1 LANs, WANs and the DeviceThe actual physical connection determines whether the Device ports are LAN or WAN ports. There are two separate IP networks, one inside the LAN network and the other outside the WAN network as shown next.Figure 58 LAN and WAN IP Addresses7.10.2 DHCP SetupDHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows individual clients to obtain TCP/IP configuration at start-up from a server. You can configure the Device as a DHCP server or disable it. When configured as a server, the Device provides the TCP/IP configuration for the clients. If you turn DHCP service off, you must have another DHCP server on your LAN, or else the computer must be manually configured. IP Pool SetupThe Device is pre-configured with a pool of IP addresses for the DHCP clients (DHCP Pool). See the product specifications in the appendices. Do not assign static IP addresses from the DHCP pool to your LAN computers.7.10.3 DNS Server Addresses DNS (Domain Name System) maps a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it. The DNS server addresses you enter when you set up DHCP are passed to the client machines along with the assigned IP address and subnet mask.There are two ways that an ISP disseminates the DNS server addresses. • The ISP tells you the DNS server addresses, usually in the form of an information sheet, when you sign up. If your ISP gives you DNS server addresses, enter them in the DN S Se rver fields in the DH CP Set up screen.WANLAN
Chapter 7 Home NetworkingVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide122• Some ISPs choose to disseminate the DNS server addresses using the DNS server extensions of IPCP (IP Control Protocol) after the connection is up. If your ISP did not give you explicit DNS servers, chances are the DNS servers are conveyed through IPCP negotiation. The Device supports the IPCP DNS server extensions through the DNS proxy feature.Please note that DNS proxy works only when the ISP uses the IPCP DNS server extensions. It does not mean you can leave the DNS servers out of the DHCP setup under all circumstances. If your ISP gives you explicit DNS servers, make sure that you enter their IP addresses in the DH CP Se t up screen.7.10.4 LAN TCP/IP The Device has built-in DHCP server capability that assigns IP addresses and DNS servers to systems that support DHCP client capability.IP Address and Subnet MaskSimilar to the way houses on a street share a common street name, so too do computers on a LAN share one common network number.Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation. If the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses, follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask.If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number, then most likely you have a single user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established. If this is the case, it is recommended that you select a network number from 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.0 and you must enable the Network Address Translation (NAT) feature of the Device. The Internet Assigned Number Authority (IANA) reserved this block of addresses specifically for private use; please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise. Let's say you select 192.168.1.0 as the network number; which covers 254 individual addresses, from 192.168.1.1 to 192.168.1.254 (zero and 255 are reserved). In other words, the first three numbers specify the network number while the last number identifies an individual computer on that network.Once you have decided on the network number, pick an IP address that is easy to remember, for instance, 192.168.1.1, for your Device, but make sure that no other device on your network is using that IP address.The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your Device will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered. You don't need to change the subnet mask computed by the Device unless you are instructed to do otherwise.Private IP AddressesEvery machine on the Internet must have a unique address. If your networks are isolated from the Internet, for example, only between your two branch offices, you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems. However, the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) has reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks:• 10.0.0.0 — 10.255.255.255• 172.16.0.0 — 172.31.255.255• 192.168.0.0 — 192.168.255.255
Chapter 7 Home NetworkingVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 123You can obtain your IP address from the IANA, from an ISP or it can be assigned from a private network. If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP, the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks. On the other hand, if you are part of a much larger organization, you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP addresses.Note: Regardless of your particular situation, do not create an arbitrary IP address; always follow the guidelines above. For more information on address assignment, please refer to RFC 1597, “Address Allocation for Private Internets” and RFC 1466, “Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space”.
Chapter 7 Home NetworkingVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide124
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 125CHAPTER 8Routing8.1 Overview The Device usually uses the default gateway to route outbound traffic from computers on the LAN to the Internet. To have the Device send data to devices not reachable through the default gateway, use static routes.For example, the next figure shows a computer (A) connected to the Device’s LAN interface. The Device routes most traffic from A to the Internet through the Device’s default gateway (R1 ). You create one static route to connect to services offered by your ISP behind router R2 . You create another static route to communicate with a separate network behind a router R3 connected to the LAN. Figure 59 Example of Routing TopologyWANR1R2AR3LAN
Chapter 8 RoutingVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide1268.2 The Routing ScreenUse this screen to view and configure the static route rules on the Device. Click Net w or k Set t ing > Rou t ing > St at ic Rou t e to open the following screen.Figure 60 Network Setting > Routing > Static RouteThe following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 38 Network Setting > Routing > Static RouteLABEL DESCRIPTIONAdd new static routeClick this to configure a new static route.#This is the index number of the entry.Status This field displays whether the static route is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this route is active. A gray bulb signifies that this route is not active.Name This is the name that describes or identifies this route. Destination IP This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination. Routing is always based on network number. Subnet Mask/Prefix LengthThis parameter specifies the IP network subnet mask of the final destination.Gateway This is the IP address of the gateway. The gateway is a router or switch on the same network segment as the device's LAN or WAN port. The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations.Interface This is the WAN interface used for this static route.Modify/Delete Click the Edit icon to edit the static route on the Device.Click the De le t e icon to remove a static route from the Device. A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the route.
Chapter 8 RoutingVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 1278.2.1 Add/Edit Static Route Use this screen to add or edit a static route. Click Add ne w sta t ic r out e in the Rou t ing screen or the Ed it icon next to the static route you want to edit. The screen shown next appears.Figure 61 Routing: Add/EditThe following table describes the labels in this screen. 8.3 The Policy Forwarding ScreenTraditionally, routing is based on the destination address only and the Device takes the shortest path to forward a packet. Policy forwarding allows the Device to override the default routing behavior and alter the packet forwarding based on the policy defined by the network administrator. Policy-based routing is applied to outgoing packets, prior to the normal routing.Table 39 Routing: Add/EditLABEL DESCRIPTIONActive This field allows you to activate/deactivate this static route.Select this to enable the static route. Clear this to disable this static route without having to delete the entry.Route Name Enter a descriptive name for the static route.IP Type Select whether your IP type is I Pv4 or I Pv6 . Destination IP AddressEnter the IPv4 or IPv6 network address of the final destination. IP Subnet Mask If you are using IPv4 and need to specify a route to a single host, use a subnet mask of 255.255.255.255 in the subnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to the host ID. Enter the IP subnet mask here.Use Gateway IP Address The gateway is a router or switch on the same network segment as the device's LAN or WAN port. The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations.If you want to use the gateway IP address, select Ena b le .Gateway IP AddressEnter the IP address of the gateway. Use Interface Select the WAN interface you want to use for this static route.Apply Click Apply to save your changes.Cancel Click Cance l to exit this screen without saving.
Chapter 8 RoutingVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide128You can use source-based policy forwarding to direct traffic from different users through different connections or distribute traffic among multiple paths for load sharing.The Policy For w a r ding screen let you view and configure routing policies on the Device. Click N e t w or k Se t t ing > Rout ing > Policy Forw ar din g to open the following screen.Figure 62 Network Setting > Routing > Policy ForwardingThe following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 40 Network Setting > Routing >Policy ForwardingLABEL DESCRIPTIONAdd new Policy Forward RuleClick this to create a new policy forwarding rule.#This is the index number of the entry.Policy Name This is the name of the rule.Source IP This is the source IP address.Source Subnet Maskhis is the source subnet mask address.Protocol This is the transport layer protocol.Source Port This is the source port number.WAN This is the WAN interface through which the traffic is routed. Modify/Delete Click the Ed it icon to edit this policy.Click the De le t e icon to remove a policy from the Device. A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the policy.
Chapter 8 RoutingVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 1298.3.1 Add/Edit Policy Forwarding Click Add new Policy Forw ar d Rule in the Policy Forw arding screen or click the Edit icon next to a policy. Use this screen to configure the required information for a policy route.Figure 63 Policy Forwarding: Add/Edit The following table describes the labels in this screen. 8.4 RIP Routing Information Protocol (RIP, RFC 1058 and RFC 1389) allows a device to exchange routing information with other routers.Table 41 Policy Forwarding: Add/EditLABEL DESCRIPTIONPolicy Name Enter a descriptive name of up to 8 printable English keyboard characters, not including spaces.Source IP Enter the source IP address.Source Subnet MaskEnter the source subnet mask address. Protocol Select the transport layer protocol (TCP or UD P). Source Port Enter the source port number. Source MAC Enter the source MAC address. WAN Select a WAN interface through which the traffic is sent. You must have the WAN interface(s) already configured in the Broa dba nd screens. Apply Click Apply to save your changes.Cancel Click Cance l to exit this screen without saving.
Chapter 8 RoutingVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide1308.4.1 The RIP ScreenClick N et w ork Se t t ing > Rou t ing > RI P to open the RI P screen. Figure 64 RIP The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 42 RIPLABEL DESCRIPTION#This is the index of the interface in which the RIP setting is used. Interface This is the name of the interface in which the RIP setting is used. Version The RIP version controls the format and the broadcasting method of the RIP packets that the Device sends (it recognizes both formats when receiving). RIP version 1 is universally supported but RIP version 2 carries more information. RIP version 1 is probably adequate for most networks, unless you have an unusual network topology. Operation Select Pa ssive to have the Device update the routing table based on the RIP packets received from neighbors but not advertise its route information to other routers in this interface.Select Act iv e to have the Device advertise its route information and also listen for routing updates from neighboring routers.Enabled Select the check box to activate the settings.Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Device.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 131CHAPTER 9Quality of Service (QoS)9.1 Overview Quality of Service (QoS) refers to both a network’s ability to deliver data with minimum delay, and the networking methods used to control the use of bandwidth. Without QoS, all traffic data is equally likely to be dropped when the network is congested. This can cause a reduction in network performance and make the network inadequate for time-critical application such as video-on-demand.Configure QoS on the Device to group and prioritize application traffic and fine-tune network performance. Setting up QoS involves these steps:1Configure classifiers to sort traffic into different flows. 2Assign priority and define actions to be performed for a classified traffic flow. The Device assigns each packet a priority and then queues the packet accordingly. Packets assigned a high priority are processed more quickly than those with low priority if there is congestion, allowing time-sensitive applications to flow more smoothly. Time-sensitive applications include both those that require a low level of latency (delay) and a low level of jitter (variations in delay) such as Voice over IP (VoIP) or Internet gaming, and those for which jitter alone is a problem such as Internet radio or streaming video.This chapter contains information about configuring QoS and editing classifiers.9.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter•The Gen e r a l screen lets you enable or disable QoS and set the upstream bandwidth (Section 9.3 on page 133).•The Qu e ue Set up screen lets you configure QoS queue assignment (Section 9.4 on page 134).•The Class Se t u p screen lets you add, edit or delete QoS classifiers (Section 9.5 on page 136).•The Policer Set u p screen lets you add, edit or delete QoS policers (Section 9.5 on page 136).•The M on it or screen lets you view the Device's QoS-related packet statistics (Section 9.7 on page 143).
Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS)VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide1329.2 What You Need to KnowThe following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter.QoS versus CosQoS is used to prioritize source-to-destination traffic flows. All packets in the same flow are given the same priority. CoS (class of service) is a way of managing traffic in a network by grouping similar types of traffic together and treating each type as a class. You can use CoS to give different priorities to different packet types. CoS technologies include IEEE 802.1p layer 2 tagging and DiffServ (Differentiated Services or DS). IEEE 802.1p tagging makes use of three bits in the packet header, while DiffServ is a new protocol and defines a new DS field, which replaces the eight-bit ToS (Type of Service) field in the IP header. Tagging and MarkingIn a QoS class, you can configure whether to add or change the DSCP (DiffServ Code Point) value, IEEE 802.1p priority level and VLAN ID number in a matched packet. When the packet passes through a compatible network, the networking device, such as a backbone switch, can provide specific treatment or service based on the tag or marker.Traffic ShapingBursty traffic may cause network congestion. Traffic shaping regulates packets to be transmitted with a pre-configured data transmission rate using buffers (or queues). Your Device uses the Token Bucket algorithm to allow a certain amount of large bursts while keeping a limit at the average rate. TrafficTimeTraffic RateTrafficTimeTraffic Rate(Before Traffic Shaping) (After Traffic Shaping)
Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS)VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 133Traffic PolicingTraffic policing is the limiting of the input or output transmission rate of a class of traffic on the basis of user-defined criteria. Traffic policing methods measure traffic flows against user-defined criteria and identify it as either conforming, exceeding or violating the criteria.The Device supports three incoming traffic metering algorithms: Token Bucket Filter (TBF), Single Rate Two Color Maker (srTCM), and Two Rate Two Color Marker (trTCM). You can specify actions which are performed on the colored packets. See Section 9.8 on page 144 for more information on each metering algorithm.9.3 The Quality of Service General Screen Click N e t w or k Set t in g > QoS > Ge n e ra l to open the screen as shown next. Use this screen to enable or disable QoS and set the upstream bandwidth. See Section 9.1 on page 131 for more information.Figure 65 Network Settings > QoS > General TrafficTimeTraffic RateTrafficTimeTraffic Rate(Before Traffic Policing) (After Traffic Policing)
Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS)VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide134The following table describes the labels in this screen. 9.4 The Queue Setup ScreenClick N et w ork Set t in g > QoS > Queue Se t up to open the screen as shown next. Table 43 Network Setting > QoS > GeneralLABEL DESCRIPTIONQoS Select the Ena b le check box to turn on QoS to improve your network performance. WAN Managed Upstream Bandwidth Enter the amount of upstream bandwidth for the WAN interfaces that you want to allocate using QoS. The recommendation is to set this speed to match the interfaces’ actual transmission speed. For example, set the WAN interfaces’ speed to 100000 kbps if your Internet connection has an upstream transmission speed of 100 Mbps. You can set this number higher than the interfaces’ actual transmission speed. The Device uses up to 95% of the DSL port’s actual upstream transmission speed even if you set this number higher than the DSL port’s actual transmission speed.You can also set this number lower than the interfaces’ actual transmission speed. This will cause the Device to not use some of the interfaces’ available bandwidth.If you leave this field blank, the Device automatically sets this number to be 95% of the WAN interfaces’ actual upstream transmission speed.LAN Managed Downstream Bandwidth Enter the amount of downstream bandwidth for the LAN interfaces (including WLAN) that you want to allocate using QoS. The recommendation is to set this speed to match the WAN interfaces’ actual transmission speed. For example, set the LAN managed downstream bandwidth to 100000 kbps if you use a 100 Mbps wired Ethernet WAN connection. You can also set this number lower than the WAN interfaces’ actual transmission speed. This will cause the Device to not use some of the interfaces’ available bandwidth.If you leave this field blank, the Device automatically sets this to the LAN interfaces’ maximum supported connection speed.Upstream traffic priority Assigned bySelect how the Device assigns priorities to various upstream traffic flows.•N on e : Disables auto priority mapping and has the Device put packets into the queues according to your classification rules. Traffic which does not match any of the classification rules is mapped into the default queue with the lowest priority.•Et h ern e t Pr ior it y : Automatically assign priority based on the IEEE 802.1p priority level.•I P Pr ecede n ce: Automatically assign priority based on the first three bits of the TOS field in the IP header.•Pa cke t Lengt h: Automatically assign priority based on the packet size. Smaller packets get higher priority since control, signaling, VoIP, internet gaming, or other real-time packets are usually small while larger packets are usually best effort data packets like file transfers.Apply Click Apply to save your changes.Cancel Click Ca ncel to restore your previously saved settings.
Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS)VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 135Use this screen to configure QoS queue assignment. Figure 66 Network Setting > QoS > Queue Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 44 Network Setting > QoS > Queue SetupLABEL DESCRIPTIONAdd new Queue Click this button to create a new queue entry.#This is the index number of the entry.Status This field displays whether the queue is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this queue is active. A gray bulb signifies that this queue is not active.Name This shows the descriptive name of this queue.Interface This shows the name of the Device’s interface through which traffic in this queue passes.Priority This shows the priority of this queue.Weight This shows the weight of this queue.Buffer Management This shows the queue management algorithm used for this queue.Queue management algorithms determine how the Device should handle packets when it receives too many (network congestion). Rate Limit This shows the maximum transmission rate allowed for traffic on this queue.Modify/Delete Click the Ed it icon to edit the queue.Click the De le t e icon to delete an existing queue. Note that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action.
Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS)VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide1369.4.1 Adding a QoS Queue Click Add ne w Queue or the edit icon in the Qu e u e Se t u p screen to configure a queue. Figure 67 Queue Setup: Add The following table describes the labels in this screen. 9.5 The Class Setup Screen Use this screen to add, edit or delete QoS classifiers. A classifier groups traffic into data flows according to specific criteria such as the source address, destination address, source port number, Table 45 Queue Setup: AddLABEL DESCRIPTIONActive Select to enable or disable this queue.Name Enter the descriptive name of this queue.Interface Select the interface to which this queue is applied.This field is read-only if you are editing the queue.Priority Select the priority level (from 1 to 7) of this queue.The smaller the number, the higher the priority level. Traffic assigned to higher priority queues gets through faster while traffic in lower priority queues is dropped if the network is congested.Weight Select the weight (from 1 to 8) of this queue. If two queues have the same priority level, the Device divides the bandwidth across the queues according to their weights. Queues with larger weights get more bandwidth than queues with smaller weights.Buffer ManagementThis field displays Dr op Ta il ( D T) . Drop Tail ( D T) is a simple queue management algorithm that allows the Device buffer to accept as many packets as it can until it is full. Once the buffer is full, new packets that arrive are dropped until there is space in the buffer again (packets are transmitted out of it). Rate Limit Specify the maximum transmission rate (in Kbps) allowed for traffic on this queue.OK Click OK to save your changes.Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS)VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 137destination port number or incoming interface. For example, you can configure a classifier to select traffic from the same protocol port (such as Telnet) to form a flow.You can give different priorities to traffic that the Device forwards out through the WAN interface. Give high priority to voice and video to make them run more smoothly. Similarly, give low priority to many large file downloads so that they do not reduce the quality of other applications. Click N et w ork Set t in g > QoS > Class Se t up to open the following screen.Figure 68 Network Setting > QoS > Class Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 46 Network Setting > QoS > Class SetupLABEL DESCRIPTIONAdd new Classifier Click this to create a new classifier.#This is the index number of the entry.Status This field displays whether the classifier is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this classifier is active. A gray bulb signifies that this classifier is not active.Class Name This is the name of the classifier.Classification CriteriaThis shows criteria specified in this classifier, for example the interface from which traffic of this class should come and the source MAC address of traffic that matches this classifier.DSCP Mark This is the DSCP number added to traffic of this classifier.802.1P Mark This is the IEEE 802.1p priority level assigned to traffic of this classifier.VLAN ID Tag This is the VLAN ID number assigned to traffic of this classifier.To Queue This is the name of the queue in which traffic of this classifier is put.Modify/Delete Click the Ed it icon to edit the classifier.Click the D e let e icon to delete an existing classifier. Note that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action.
Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS)VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide1389.5.1 Add/Edit QoS Class Click Add ne w Cla ssifie r in the Class Se t u p screen or the Edit icon next to a classifier to open the following screen. Figure 69 Class Setup: Add/Edit
Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS)VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 139The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 47 Class Setup: Add/EditLABEL DESCRIPTIONActive Select this to enable this classifier.Class Name Enter a descriptive name of up to 15 printable English keyboard characters, not including spaces.Classification OrderSelect an existing number for where you want to put this classifier to move the classifier to the number you selected after clicking App ly.Select La st to put this rule in the back of the classifier list.From Interface If you want to classify the traffic by an ingress interface, select an interface from the From I n t e r fa ce drop-down list box. Ether Type Select a predefined application to configure a class for the matched traffic.If you select I P, you also need to configure source or destination MAC address, IP address, DHCP options, DSCP value or the protocol type.If you select 8 0 2 .1 Q, you can configure an 802.1p priority level.SourceAddress Select the check box and enter the source IP address in dotted decimal notation. A blank source IP address means any source IP address. Subnet Netmask Enter the source subnet mask.Port Range If you select TCP or UD P in the I P Prot ocol field, select the check box and enter the port number(s) of the source. MAC Select the check box and enter the source MAC address of the packet.MAC Mask Type the mask for the specified MAC address to determine which bits a packet’s MAC address should match. Enter “f” for each bit of the specified source MAC address that the traffic’s MAC address should match. Enter “0” for the bit(s) of the matched traffic’s MAC address, which can be of any hexadecimal character(s). For example, if you set the MAC address to 00:13:49:00:00:00 and the mask to ff:ff:ff:00:00:00, a packet with a MAC address of 00:13:49:12:34:56 matches this criteria.Exclude Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier.DestinationAddress Select the check box and enter the source IP address in dotted decimal notation. A blank source IP address means any source IP address. Subnet Netmask Enter the source subnet mask.Port Range If you select TCP or UD P in the I P Prot ocol field, select the check box and enter the port number(s) of the source. MAC Select the check box and enter the source MAC address of the packet.MAC Mask Type the mask for the specified MAC address to determine which bits a packet’s MAC address should match. Enter “f” for each bit of the specified source MAC address that the traffic’s MAC address should match. Enter “0” for the bit(s) of the matched traffic’s MAC address, which can be of any hexadecimal character(s). For example, if you set the MAC address to 00:13:49:00:00:00 and the mask to ff:ff:ff:00:00:00, a packet with a MAC address of 00:13:49:12:34:56 matches this criteria.Exclude Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier.Others
Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS)VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide140Service This field is available only when you select I P in the Et h er Type field.This field simplifies classifier configuration by allowing you to select a predefined application. When you select a predefined application, you do not configure the rest of the filter fields.IP Protocol This field is available only when you select I P in the Et her Ty pe field.Select this option and select the protocol (service type) from TCP, UDP, I CM P or I GMP. If you select Use r de fine d, enter the protocol (service type) number. DHCP This field is available only when you select I P in the Et h er Type field.Select this option and select a DHCP option. If you select Ven dor Class I D ( DH CP Opt ion 6 0 ) , enter the Vendor Class Identifier (Option 60) of the matched traffic, such as the type of the hardware or firmware.If you select Use r Class I D ( D H CP Opt ion 7 7 ) , enter a string that identifies the user’s category or application type in the matched DHCP packets.Packet Length This field is available only when you select I P in the Et he r Type field.Select this option and enter the minimum and maximum packet length (from 46 to 1500) in the fields provided.DSCP This field is available only when you select I P in the Et h er Type field.Select this option and specify a DSCP (DiffServ Code Point) number between 0 and 63 in the field provided.802.1P This field is available only when you select 80 2 .1 Q in the Et her Type field.Select this option and select a priority level (between 0 and 7) from the drop-down list box."0" is the lowest priority level and "7" is the highest.VLAN ID This field is available only when you select 8 0 2 .1 Q in the Et her Ty pe field.Select this option and specify a VLAN ID number. TCP ACK This field is available only when you select I P in the Eth e r Type field.If you select this option, the matched TCP packets must contain the ACK (Acknowledge) flag.Exclude Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier.DSCP Mark This field is available only when you select I P in the Et h er Ty pe field.If you select Ma r k, enter a DSCP value with which the Device replaces the DSCP field in the packets.If you select Un cha ng e, the Device keep the DSCP field in the packets.802.1P Mark Select a priority level with which the Device replaces the IEEE 802.1p priority field in the packets.If you select Un cha ng e, the Device keep the 802.1p priority field in the packets.VLAN ID If you select Rem a r k , enter a VLAN ID number with which the Device replaces the VLAN ID of the frames.If you select Rem ove, the Device deletes the VLAN ID of the frames before forwarding them out.If you select Add, the Device treat all matched traffic untagged and add a second VLAN ID.If you select Un cha ng e, the Device keep the VLAN ID in the packets.Forward to InterfaceSelect a WAN interface through which traffic of this class will be forwarded out. If you select Unchan ge , the Device forward traffic of this class according to the default routing table.Table 47 Class Setup: Add/Edit (continued)LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS)VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 1419.6 The QoS Policer Setup ScreenUse this screen to configure QoS policers that allow you to limit the transmission rate of incoming traffic. Click N et w ork Set ting > QoS > Policer Se t u p. The screen appears as shown. Figure 70 Network Setting > QoS > Policer Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen. To Queue Index Select a queue that applies to this class.You should have configured a queue in the Que u e Se t up screen already.Apply Click Apply to save your changes.Cancel Click Cance l to exit this screen without saving.Table 47 Class Setup: Add/Edit (continued)LABEL DESCRIPTIONTable 48 Network Setting > QoS > Policer SetupLABEL DESCRIPTIONAdd new Policer Click this to create a new entry.#This is the index number of the entry.Status This field displays whether the policer is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this policer is active. A gray bulb signifies that this policer is not active.Name This field displays the descriptive name of this policer.Regulated ClassesThis field displays the name of a QoS classifierMeter Type This field displays the type of QoS metering algorithm used in this policer.Rule These are the rates and burst sizes against which the policer checks the traffic of the member QoS classes.Action This shows the how the policer has the Device treat different types of traffic belonging to the policer’s member QoS classes.Modify/Delete Click the Ed it icon to edit the policer.Click the D e let e icon to delete an existing policer. Note that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action.
Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS)VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide1429.6.1 Add/Edit a QoS Policer Click Add ne w Police r in the Policer Se t u p screen or the Edit icon next to a policer to show the following screen. Figure 71 Policer Setup: Add/Edit The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 49 Policer Setup: Add/EditLABEL DESCRIPTIONActive Select the check box to activate this policer.Name Enter the descriptive name of this policer.Meter Type This shows the traffic metering algorithm used in this policer.The Sim ple Tok en Buck et algorithm uses tokens in a bucket to control when traffic can be transmitted. Each token represents one byte. The algorithm allows bursts of up to b bytes which is also the bucket size.The Single Ra t e Thre e Color M ark e r (srTCM) is based on the token bucket filter and identifies packets by comparing them to the Committed Information Rate (CIR), the Committed Burst Size (CBS) and the Excess Burst Size (EBS).The Tw o Ra t e Th ree Color M a r k e r (trTCM) is based on the token bucket filter and identifies packets by comparing them to the Committed Information Rate (CIR) and the Peak Information Rate (PIR).Committed RateSpecify the committed rate. When the incoming traffic rate of the member QoS classes is less than the committed rate, the device applies the conforming action to the traffic.Committed Burst SizeSpecify the committed burst size for packet bursts. This must be equal to or less than the peak burst size (two rate three color) or excess burst size (single rate three color) if it is also configured.This is the maximum size of the (first) token bucket in a traffic metering algorithm.
Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS)VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 1439.7 The QoS Monitor Screen To view the Device’s QoS packet statistics, click Net w or k Set t ing > QoS > M on it or. The screen appears as shown. Figure 72 Network Setting > QoS > Monitor The following table describes the labels in this screen. Conforming ActionSpecify what the Device does for packets within the committed rate and burst size (green-marked packets). •Pa ss: Send the packets without modification.•DSCP M ark : Change the DSCP mark value of the packets. Enter the DSCP mark value to use. Non-Conforming ActionSpecify what the Device does for packets that exceed the excess burst size or peak rate and burst size (red-marked packets). •Dr op: Discard the packets.•DSCP M ark : Change the DSCP mark value of the packets. Enter the DSCP mark value to use. The packets may be dropped if there is congestion on the network.Available ClassSelected Class Select a QoS classifier to apply this QoS policer to traffic that matches the QoS classifier.Highlight a QoS classifier in the Availa ble Class box and use the > button to move it to the Sele cted Cla ss box.To remove a QoS classifier from the Sele cte d Cla ss box, select it and use the < button.Apply Click Apply to save your changes.Cancel Click Ca ncel to exit this screen without saving.Table 49 Policer Setup: Add/EditLABEL DESCRIPTIONTable 50 Network Setting > QoS > MonitorLABEL DESCRIPTIONRefresh Interval Enter how often you want the Device to update this screen. Select N o Re fr esh to stop refreshing statistics.Interface Monitor# This is the index number of the entry.
Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS)VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide1449.8 Technical ReferenceThe following section contains additional technical information about the Device features described in this chapter.IEEE 802.1Q TagThe IEEE 802.1Q standard defines an explicit VLAN tag in the MAC header to identify the VLAN membership of a frame across bridges. A VLAN tag includes the 12-bit VLAN ID and 3-bit user priority. The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that devices need to process the frame across the network. IEEE 802.1p specifies the user priority field and defines up to eight separate traffic types. The following table describes the traffic types defined in the IEEE 802.1d standard (which incorporates the 802.1p). Name This shows the name of the interface on the Device. Pass Rate This shows how many packets forwarded to this interface are transmitted successfully.Drop Rate This shows how many packets forwarded to this interface are dropped.Queue Monitor# This is the index number of the entry.Name This shows the name of the queue. Pass Rate This shows how many packets assigned to this queue are transmitted successfully.Drop Rate This shows how many packets assigned to this queue are dropped.Table 50 Network Setting > QoS > Monitor (continued)LABEL DESCRIPTIONTable 51 IEEE 802.1p Priority Level and Traffic TypePRIORITY LEVEL TRAFFIC TYPELevel 7 Typically used for network control traffic such as router configuration messages.Level 6 Typically used for voice traffic that is especially sensitive to jitter (jitter is the variations in delay).Level 5 Typically used for video that consumes high bandwidth and is sensitive to jitter.Level 4 Typically used for controlled load, latency-sensitive traffic such as SNA (Systems Network Architecture) transactions.Level 3 Typically used for “excellent effort” or better than best effort and would include important business traffic that can tolerate some delay.Level 2 This is for “spare bandwidth”. Level 1 This is typically used for non-critical “background” traffic such as bulk transfers that are allowed but that should not affect other applications and users. Level 0 Typically used for best-effort traffic.
Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS)VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 145DiffServ QoS is used to prioritize source-to-destination traffic flows. All packets in the flow are given the same priority. You can use CoS (class of service) to give different priorities to different packet types.DiffServ (Differentiated Services) is a class of service (CoS) model that marks packets so that they receive specific per-hop treatment at DiffServ-compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow. Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points (DSCPs) indicating the level of service desired. This allows the intermediary DiffServ-compliant network devices to handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow. In addition, applications do not have to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going. DSCP and Per-Hop Behavior DiffServ defines a new Differentiated Services (DS) field to replace the Type of Service (TOS) field in the IP header. The DS field contains a 2-bit unused field and a 6-bit DSCP field which can define up to 64 service levels. The following figure illustrates the DS field. DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non-DiffServ compliant, ToS-enabled network device will not conflict with the DSCP mapping.The DSCP value determines the forwarding behavior, the PHB (Per-Hop Behavior), that each packet gets across the DiffServ network. Based on the marking rule, different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding. Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP values and the configured policies.IP PrecedenceSimilar to IEEE 802.1p prioritization at layer-2, you can use IP precedence to prioritize packets in a layer-3 network. IP precedence uses three bits of the eight-bit ToS (Type of Service) field in the IP header. There are eight classes of services (ranging from zero to seven) in IP precedence. Zero is the lowest priority level and seven is the highest. Automatic Priority Queue AssignmentIf you enable QoS on the Device, the Device can automatically base on the IEEE 802.1p priority level, IP precedence and/or packet length to assign priority to traffic which does not match a class. DSCP (6 bits) Unused (2 bits)
Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS)VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide146The following table shows you the internal layer-2 and layer-3 QoS mapping on the Device. On the Device, traffic assigned to higher priority queues gets through faster while traffic in lower index queues is dropped if the network is congested.Token BucketThe token bucket algorithm uses tokens in a bucket to control when traffic can be transmitted. The bucket stores tokens, each of which represents one byte. The algorithm allows bursts of up to b bytes which is also the bucket size, so the bucket can hold up to b tokens. Tokens are generated and added into the bucket at a constant rate. The following shows how tokens work with packets:• A packet can be transmitted if the number of tokens in the bucket is equal to or greater than the size of the packet (in bytes). • After a packet is transmitted, a number of tokens corresponding to the packet size is removed from the bucket. Table 52 Internal Layer2 and Layer3 QoS MappingPRIORITY QUEUELAYER 2 LAYER 3IEEE 802.1P USER PRIORITY (ETHERNET PRIORITY)TOS (IP PRECEDENCE) DSCP IP PACKET LENGTH (BYTE)0 1 0 000000122 0 0 000000 >11003 3 1 001110001100001010001000250~11004 4 2 0101100101000100100100005 5 3 011110011100011010011000<2506 6 4 1001101001001000101000005 1011101010007 7 6 1100001110007
Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS)VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 147• If there are no tokens in the bucket, the Device stops transmitting until enough tokens are generated. • If not enough tokens are available, the Device treats the packet in either one of the following ways:In traffic shaping:• Holds it in the queue until enough tokens are available in the bucket.In traffic policing:•Drops it.• Transmits it but adds a DSCP mark. The Device may drop these marked packets if the network is overloaded.Configure the bucket size to be equal to or less than the amount of the bandwidth that the interface can support. It does not help if you set it to a bucket size over the interface’s capability. The smaller the bucket size, the lower the data transmission rate and that may cause outgoing packets to be dropped. A larger transmission rate requires a big bucket size. For example, use a bucket size of 10 kbytes to get the transmission rate up to 10 Mbps.Single Rate Three Color Marker The Single Rate Three Color Marker (srTCM, defined in RFC 2697) is a type of traffic policing that identifies packets by comparing them to one user-defined rate, the Committed Information Rate (CIR), and two burst sizes: the Committed Burst Size (CBS) and Excess Burst Size (EBS).The srTCM evaluates incoming packets and marks them with one of three colors which refer to packet loss priority levels. High packet loss priority level is referred to as red, medium is referred to as yellow and low is referred to as green. The srTCM is based on the token bucket filter and has two token buckets (CBS and EBS). Tokens are generated and added into the bucket at a constant rate, called Committed Information Rate (CIR). When the first bucket (CBS) is full, new tokens overflow into the second bucket (EBS).All packets are evaluated against the CBS. If a packet does not exceed the CBS it is marked green. Otherwise it is evaluated against the EBS. If it is below the EBS then it is marked yellow. If it exceeds the EBS then it is marked red.The following shows how tokens work with incoming packets in srTCM:• A packet arrives. The packet is marked green and can be transmitted if the number of tokens in the CBS bucket is equal to or greater than the size of the packet (in bytes).• After a packet is transmitted, a number of tokens corresponding to the packet size is removed from the CBS bucket. • If there are not enough tokens in the CBS bucket, the Device checks the EBS bucket. The packet is marked yellow if there are sufficient tokens in the EBS bucket. Otherwise, the packet is marked red. No tokens are removed if the packet is dropped.Two Rate Three Color Marker The Two Rate Three Color Marker (trTCM, defined in RFC 2698) is a type of traffic policing that identifies packets by comparing them to two user-defined rates: the Committed Information Rate (CIR) and the Peak Information Rate (PIR). The CIR specifies the average rate at which packets are admitted to the network. The PIR is greater than or equal to the CIR. CIR and PIR values are based
Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS)VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide148on the guaranteed and maximum bandwidth respectively as negotiated between a service provider and client.The trTCM evaluates incoming packets and marks them with one of three colors which refer to packet loss priority levels. High packet loss priority level is referred to as red, medium is referred to as yellow and low is referred to as green. The trTCM is based on the token bucket filter and has two token buckets (Committed Burst Size (CBS) and Peak Burst Size (PBS)). Tokens are generated and added into the two buckets at the CIR and PIR respectively. All packets are evaluated against the PIR. If a packet exceeds the PIR it is marked red. Otherwise it is evaluated against the CIR. If it exceeds the CIR then it is marked yellow. Finally, if it is below the CIR then it is marked green.The following shows how tokens work with incoming packets in trTCM:• A packet arrives. If the number of tokens in the PBS bucket is less than the size of the packet (in bytes), the packet is marked red and may be dropped regardless of the CBS bucket. No tokens are removed if the packet is dropped.• If the PBS bucket has enough tokens, the Device checks the CBS bucket. The packet is marked green and can be transmitted if the number of tokens in the CBS bucket is equal to or greater than the size of the packet (in bytes). Otherwise, the packet is marked yellow.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 149CHAPTER 10Network Address Translation (NAT)10.1 OverviewThis chapter discusses how to configure NAT on the Device. NAT (Network Address Translation - NAT, RFC 1631) is the translation of the IP address of a host in a packet, for example, the source address of an outgoing packet, used within one network to a different IP address known within another network.10.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter•Use the Por t For w ar din g screen to configure forward incoming service requests to the server(s) on your local network (Section 10.2 on page 150). •Use the App lica t ion s screen to forward incoming service requests to the server(s) on your local network (Section 10.3 on page 153).•Use the Port Tr igge rin g screen to add and configure the Device’s trigger port settings (Section 10.4 on page 155).•Use the DM Z screen to configure a default server (Section 10.5 on page 158).•Use the ALG screen to enable and disable the NAT and SIP (VoIP) ALG in the Device (Section 10.6 on page 158).•Use the Addr ess M a pping screen to configure the Device's address mapping settings (Section 10.7 on page 159). 10.1.2 What You Need To KnowInside/OutsideInside/outside denotes where a host is located relative to the Device, for example, the computers of your subscribers are the inside hosts, while the web servers on the Internet are the outside hosts. Global/LocalGlobal/local denotes the IP address of a host in a packet as the packet traverses a router, for example, the local address refers to the IP address of a host when the packet is in the local network, while the global address refers to the IP address of the host when the same packet is traveling in the WAN side. NATIn the simplest form, NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from a subscriber (the inside local address) to another (the inside global address) before forwarding the packet to the
Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT)VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide150WAN side. When the response comes back, NAT translates the destination address (the inside global address) back to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host.Port ForwardingA port forwarding set is a list of inside (behind NAT on the LAN) servers, for example, web or FTP, that you can make visible to the outside world even though NAT makes your whole inside network appear as a single computer to the outside world.Finding Out MoreSee Section 10.8 on page 161 for advanced technical information on NAT.10.2 The Port Forwarding Screen Use the Port For w arding screen to forward incoming service requests to the server(s) on your local network.You may enter a single port number or a range of port numbers to be forwarded, and the local IP address of the desired server. The port number identifies a service; for example, web service is on port 80 and FTP on port 21. In some cases, such as for unknown services or where one server can support more than one service (for example both FTP and web service), it might be better to specify a range of port numbers. You can allocate a server IP address that corresponds to a port or a range of ports.Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers. Note: Many residential broadband ISP accounts do not allow you to run any server processes (such as a Web or FTP server) from your location. Your ISP may periodically check for servers and may suspend your account if it discovers any active services at your location. If you are unsure, refer to your ISP.Configuring Servers Behind Port Forwarding (Example)Let's say you want to assign ports 21-25 to one FTP, Telnet and SMTP server (A in the example), port 80 to another (B in the example) and assign a default server IP address of 192.168.1.35 to a
Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT)VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 151third (C in the example). You assign the LAN IP addresses and the ISP assigns the WAN IP address. The NAT network appears as a single host on the Internet.Figure 73 Multiple Servers Behind NAT ExampleClick N et w or k Set t ing > N AT > Port For w a rding to open the following screen.Figure 74 Network Setting > NAT > Port ForwardingThe following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 53 Network Setting > NAT > Port ForwardingLABEL DESCRIPTIONAdd new rule Click this to add a new rule.#This is the index number of the entry.Status This field displays whether the NAT rule is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this rule is active. A gray bulb signifies that this rule is not active.Service Name This shows the service’s name.WAN Interface This shows the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded.WAN IP This field displays the incoming packet’s destination IP address.Server IP AddressThis is the server’s IP address.Start Port This is the first external port number that identifies a service.End Port This is the last external port number that identifies a service.Translation Start Port This is the first internal port number that identifies a service.A=192.168.1.33D=192.168.1.36C=192.168.1.3B=192.168.1.34WANLAN192.168.1.1 IP Address assigned by ISP
Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT)VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide15210.2.1 Add/Edit Port Forwarding Click Add ne w rule in the Por t For w a rding screen or click the Edit icon next to an existing rule to open the following screen.Figure 75 Port Forwarding: Add/Edit The following table describes the labels in this screen. Translation End Port This is the last internal port number that identifies a service.Protocol This shows the IP protocol supported by this virtual server, whether it is TCP, UD P, or TCP/UDP.Modify/Delete Click the Ed it icon to edit this rule.Click the De le t e icon to delete an existing rule. Table 53 Network Setting > NAT > Port Forwarding (continued)LABEL DESCRIPTIONTable 54 Port Forwarding: Add/EditLABEL DESCRIPTIONActive Clear the checkbox to disable the rule. Select the check box to enable it.Service Name Enter a name to identify this rule using keyboard characters (A-Z, a-z, 1-2 and so on). WAN Interface Select the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded.You must have already configured a WAN connection with NAT enabled.
Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT)VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 15310.3 The Applications ScreenThis screen provides a summary of all NAT applications and their configuration. In addition, this screen allows you to create new applications and/or remove existing ones.To access this screen, click N et w or k Set t ing > N AT > Applica t ions. The following screen appears.Figure 76 Network Setting > NAT > ApplicationsWAN IP Enter the WAN IP address for which the incoming service is destined. If the packet’s destination IP address doesn’t match the one specified here, the port forwarding rule will not be applied.Start Port Enter the original destination port for the packets.To forward only one port, enter the port number again in the End Port field. To forward a series of ports, enter the start port number here and the end port number in the En d Port field.End Port Enter the last port of the original destination port range. To forward only one port, enter the port number in the St a r t Por t field above and then enter it again in this field. To forward a series of ports, enter the last port number in a series that begins with the port number in the St a rt Port field above.Translation Start PortThis shows the port number to which you want the Device to translate the incoming port. For a range of ports, enter the first number of the range to which you want the incoming ports translated.Translation End Port This shows the last port of the translated port range.Server IP AddressEnter the inside IP address of the virtual server here.Protocol Select the protocol supported by this virtual server. Choices are TCP, UD P, or TCP/ UDP.OK Click OK to save your changes.Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.Table 54 Port Forwarding: Add/Edit (continued)LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT)VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide154The following table describes the labels in this screen. 10.3.1 Add New ApplicationThis screen lets you create new NAT application rules. Click Add n e w applicat ion in the Applicat ions screen to open the following screen.Figure 77 Applications: Add The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 55 Network Setting > NAT > ApplicationsLABEL DESCRIPTIONAdd new applicationClick this to add a new NAT application rule.Application ForwardedThis field shows the type of application that the service forwards.WAN Interface This field shows the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded.Server IP AddressThis field displays the destination IP address for the service.Delete Click the De let e icon to delete the rule.Table 56 Applications: AddLABEL DESCRIPTIONWAN Interface Select the WAN interface that you want to apply this NAT rule to.Server IP AddressEnter the inside IP address of the application here.Application CategorySelect the category of the application from the drop-down list box.Application ForwardedSelect a service from the drop-down list box and the Device automatically configures the protocol, start, end, and map port number that define the service.View Rule Click this to display the configuration of the service that you have chosen in Applica t ion Fow a rded.OK Click OK to save your changes.Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT)VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 15510.4 The Port Triggering ScreenSome services use a dedicated range of ports on the client side and a dedicated range of ports on the server side. With regular port forwarding you set a forwarding port in NAT to forward a service (coming in from the server on the WAN) to the IP address of a computer on the client side (LAN). The problem is that port forwarding only forwards a service to a single LAN IP address. In order to use the same service on a different LAN computer, you have to manually replace the LAN computer's IP address in the forwarding port with another LAN computer's IP address. Trigger port forwarding solves this problem by allowing computers on the LAN to dynamically take turns using the service. The Device records the IP address of a LAN computer that sends traffic to the WAN to request a service with a specific port number and protocol (a "trigger" port). When the Device's WAN port receives a response with a specific port number and protocol ("open" port), the Device forwards the traffic to the LAN IP address of the computer that sent the request. After that computer’s connection for that service closes, another computer on the LAN can use the service in the same manner. This way you do not need to configure a new IP address each time you want a different LAN computer to use the application.For example:Figure 78 Trigger Port Forwarding Process: Example1Jane requests a file from the Real Audio server (port 7070).2Port 7070 is a “trigger” port and causes the Device to record Jane’s computer IP address. The Device associates Jane's computer IP address with the "open" port range of 6970-7170.3The Real Audio server responds using a port number ranging between 6970-7170.4The Device forwards the traffic to Jane’s computer IP address. 5Only Jane can connect to the Real Audio server until the connection is closed or times out. The Device times out in three minutes with UDP (User Datagram Protocol) or two hours with TCP/IP (Transfer Control Protocol/Internet Protocol).
Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT)VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide156Click Net w ork Se t t in g > N AT > Por t Tr igger ing to open the following screen. Use this screen to view your Device’s trigger port settings.Figure 79 Network Setting > NAT > Port Triggering The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 57 Network Setting > NAT > Port TriggeringLABEL DESCRIPTIONAdd new rule Click this to create a new rule.#This is the index number of the entry.Status This field displays whether the port triggering rule is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this rule is active. A gray bulb signifies that this rule is not active.Service Name This field displays the name of the service used by this rule.WAN Interface This field shows the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded.Trigger Start PortThe trigger port is a port (or a range of ports) that causes (or triggers) the Device to record the IP address of the LAN computer that sent the traffic to a server on the WAN.This is the first port number that identifies a service.Trigger End PortThis is the last port number that identifies a service.Trigger Proto. This is the trigger transport layer protocol. Open Start Port The open port is a port (or a range of ports) that a server on the WAN uses when it sends out a particular service. The Device forwards the traffic with this port (or range of ports) to the client computer on the LAN that requested the service. This is the first port number that identifies a service.Open End Port This is the last port number that identifies a service.Open Proto. This is the open transport layer protocol.Modify/Delete Click the Edit icon to edit this rule.Click the D e le t e icon to delete an existing rule.
Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT)VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 15710.4.1 Add/Edit Port Triggering Rule This screen lets you create new port triggering rules. Click Add new r u le in the Port Tr iggering screen or click a rule’s Edit icon to open the following screen.Figure 80 Port Triggering: Add/Edit The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 58 Port Triggering: Configuration Add/EditLABEL DESCRIPTIONActive Select the check box to enable this rule.Service Name Enter a name to identify this rule using keyboard characters (A-Z, a-z, 1-2 and so on). WAN Interface Select a WAN interface for which you want to configure port triggering rules.Trigger Start PortThe trigger port is a port (or a range of ports) that causes (or triggers) the Device to record the IP address of the LAN computer that sent the traffic to a server on the WAN.Type a port number or the starting port number in a range of port numbers.Trigger End Port Type a port number or the ending port number in a range of port numbers.Trigger Protocol Select the transport layer protocol from TCP, UD P, or TCP/ UDP.Open Start Port The open port is a port (or a range of ports) that a server on the WAN uses when it sends out a particular service. The Device forwards the traffic with this port (or range of ports) to the client computer on the LAN that requested the service. Type a port number or the starting port number in a range of port numbers.Open End Port Type a port number or the ending port number in a range of port numbers.Open Protocol Select the transport layer protocol from TCP, UD P, or TCP/ UDP.OK Click OK to save your changes.Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT)VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide15810.5 The DMZ ScreenIn addition to the servers for specified services, NAT supports a default server IP address. A default server receives packets from ports that are not specified in the N AT Por t For w a r din g Set u p screen.Figure 81 Network Setting > NAT > DMZ The following table describes the fields in this screen. 10.6 The ALG ScreenSome NAT routers may include a SIP Application Layer Gateway (ALG). A SIP ALG allows SIP calls to pass through NAT by examining and translating IP addresses embedded in the data stream. When the Device registers with the SIP register server, the SIP ALG translates the Device’s private IP address inside the SIP data stream to a public IP address. You do not need to use STUN or an outbound proxy if your Device is behind a SIP ALG.Use this screen to enable and disable the NAT and SIP (VoIP) ALG in the Device. To access this screen, click N e t w ork Se t t in g > N AT > ALG.Figure 82 Network Setting > NAT > ALGTable 59 Network Setting > NAT > DMZLABEL DESCRIPTIONDefault Server AddressEnter the IP address of the default server which receives packets from ports that are not specified in the NAT Por t For w a r din g screen. Note: If you do not assign a Default Server Address, the Device discards all packets received for ports that are not specified in the NAT Port Forwarding screen.Apply Click Apply to save your changes.Cancel Click Cance l to restore your previously saved settings.
Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT)VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 159The following table describes the fields in this screen.10.7 The Address Mapping ScreenOrdering your rules is important because the Device applies the rules in the order that you specify. When a rule matches the current packet, the Device takes the corresponding action and the remaining rules are ignored. Click N et w ork Set t in g > N AT > Addr ess M a ppin g to display the following screen. Figure 83 Network Setting > NAT > Address MappingThe following table describes the fields in this screen.Table 60 Network Setting > NAT > ALGLABEL DESCRIPTIONNAT ALG Enable this to make sure applications such as FTP and file transfer in IM applications work correctly with port-forwarding and address-mapping rules.SIP ALG Enable this to make sure SIP (VoIP) works correctly with port-forwarding and address-mapping rules.Apply Click Apply to save your changes.Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.Table 61 Network Setting > NAT > Address MappingLABEL DESCRIPTIONAdd new rule Click this to create a new rule.Set This is the index number of the address mapping set.Local Start IP This is the starting Inside Local IP Address (ILA).Local End IP This is the ending Inside Local IP Address (ILA). If the rule is for all local IP addresses, then this field displays 0.0.0.0 as the Local Start IP address and 255.255.255.255 as the Local End IP address. This field is blank for On e - t o - On e mapping types.Global Start IP This is the starting Inside Global IP Address (IGA). Enter 0.0.0.0 here if you have a dynamic IP address from your ISP. You can only do this for the M any- t o- On e mapping type. Global End IP This is the ending Inside Global IP Address (IGA). This field is blank for One- t o- On e and Man y- t o- On e mapping types.
Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT)VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide16010.7.1 Add/Edit Address Mapping RuleTo add or edit an address mapping rule, click Add ne w rule or the rule’s edit icon in the Addr e ss Ma pping screen to display the screen shown next. Figure 84 Address Mapping: Add/EditThe following table describes the fields in this screen.Type This is the address mapping type.On e- t o- One : This mode maps one local IP address to one global IP address. Note that port numbers do not change for the One-to-one NAT mapping type.M a ny - t o- O ne : This mode maps multiple local IP addresses to one global IP address. This is equivalent to SUA (i.e., PAT, port address translation), the Device's Single User Account feature that previous routers supported only. M a ny - t o- M a n y: This mode maps multiple local IP addresses to shared global IP addresses.Modify/Delete Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the address mapping rule.Click the D e let e icon to delete an existing address mapping rule. Note that subsequent address mapping rules move up by one when you take this action.Table 61 Network Setting > NAT > Address Mapping (continued)LABEL DESCRIPTIONTable 62 Address Mapping: Add/EditLABEL DESCRIPTIONType Choose the IP/port mapping type from one of the following.On e- t o- One : This mode maps one local IP address to one global IP address. Note that port numbers do not change for the One-to-one NAT mapping type.M a ny - t o- O ne : This mode maps multiple local IP addresses to one global IP address. This is equivalent to SUA (i.e., PAT, port address translation), the Device's Single User Account feature that previous routers supported only. M a ny - t o- M a n y: This mode maps multiple local IP addresses to shared global IP addresses.Local Start IP Enter the starting Inside Local IP Address (ILA).
Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT)VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 16110.8 Technical ReferenceThis part contains more information regarding NAT.10.8.1 NAT DefinitionsInside/outside denotes where a host is located relative to the Device, for example, the computers of your subscribers are the inside hosts, while the web servers on the Internet are the outside hosts. Global/local denotes the IP address of a host in a packet as the packet traverses a router, for example, the local address refers to the IP address of a host when the packet is in the local network, while the global address refers to the IP address of the host when the same packet is traveling in the WAN side. Local End IP Enter the ending Inside Local IP Address (ILA). If the rule is for all local IP addresses, then this field displays 0.0.0.0 as the Local Start IP address and 255.255.255.255 as the Local End IP address. This field is blank for On e - t o - On e mapping types.Global Start IP Enter the starting Inside Global IP Address (IGA). Enter 0.0.0.0 here if you have a dynamic IP address from your ISP. You can only do this for the M any- t o- On e mapping type. Global End IP Enter the ending Inside Global IP Address (IGA). This field is blank for One - t o- One and Man y- t o- On e mapping types.Set Select the number of the mapping set for which you want to configure.OK Click OK to save your changes.Cancel Click Cance l to exit this screen without saving.Table 62 Address Mapping: Add/Edit (continued)LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT)VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide162Note that inside/outside refers to the location of a host, while global/local refers to the IP address of a host used in a packet. Thus, an inside local address (ILA) is the IP address of an inside host in a packet when the packet is still in the local network, while an inside global address (IGA) is the IP address of the same inside host when the packet is on the WAN side. The following table summarizes this information.NAT never changes the IP address (either local or global) of an outside host.10.8.2 What NAT DoesIn the simplest form, NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from a subscriber (the inside local address) to another (the inside global address) before forwarding the packet to the WAN side. When the response comes back, NAT translates the destination address (the inside global address) back to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host. Note that the IP address (either local or global) of an outside host is never changed.The global IP addresses for the inside hosts can be either static or dynamically assigned by the ISP. In addition, you can designate servers, for example, a web server and a telnet server, on your local network and make them accessible to the outside world. If you do not define any servers (for Many-to-One and Many-to-Many Overload mapping), NAT offers the additional benefit of firewall protection. With no servers defined, your Device filters out all incoming inquiries, thus preventing intruders from probing your network. For more information on IP address translation, refer to RFC 1631, The I P Net work Address Translator ( NAT) .Table 63 NAT DefinitionsITEM DESCRIPTIONInside This refers to the host on the LAN.Outside This refers to the host on the WAN.Local This refers to the packet address (source or destination) as the packet travels on the LAN.Global This refers to the packet address (source or destination) as the packet travels on the WAN.
Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT)VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 16310.8.3 How NAT WorksEach packet has two addresses – a source address and a destination address. For outgoing packets, the ILA (Inside Local Address) is the source address on the LAN, and the IGA (Inside Global Address) is the source address on the WAN. For incoming packets, the ILA is the destination address on the LAN, and the IGA is the destination address on the WAN. NAT maps private (local) IP addresses to globally unique ones required for communication with hosts on other networks. It replaces the original IP source address (and TCP or UDP source port numbers for Many-to-One and Many-to-Many Overload NAT mapping) in each packet and then forwards it to the Internet. The Device keeps track of the original addresses and port numbers so incoming reply packets can have their original values restored. The following figure illustrates this.Figure 85 How NAT Works192.168.1.13192.168.1.10192.168.1.11192.168.1.12 SA192.168.1.10SAIGA1Inside LocalIP Address192.168.1.10192.168.1.11192.168.1.12192.168.1.13Inside Global IP AddressIGA 1IGA 2IGA 3IGA 4NAT TableWANLANInside LocalAddress (ILA)Inside GlobalAddress (IGA)
Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT)VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide16410.8.4 NAT ApplicationThe following figure illustrates a possible NAT application, where three inside LANs (logical LANs using IP alias) behind the Device can communicate with three distinct WAN networks.Figure 86 NAT Application With IP AliasPort Forwarding: Services and Port NumbersThe most often used port numbers are shown in the following table. Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers. Please also refer to the Supporting CD for more examples and details on port forwarding and NAT.Table 64 Services and Port NumbersSERVICES PORT NUMBERECHO 7FTP (File Transfer Protocol) 21SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) 25DNS (Domain Name System) 53Finger 79HTTP (Hyper Text Transfer protocol or WWW, Web) 80POP3 (Post Office Protocol) 110NNTP (Network News Transport Protocol) 119SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) 161SNMP trap 162PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol) 1723
Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT)VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 165Port Forwarding ExampleLet's say you want to assign ports 21-25 to one FTP, Telnet and SMTP server (A in the example), port 80 to another (B in the example) and assign a default server IP address of 192.168.1.35 to a third (C in the example). You assign the LAN IP addresses and the ISP assigns the WAN IP address. The NAT network appears as a single host on the Internet.Figure 87 Multiple Servers Behind NAT ExampleD=192.168.1.36192.168.1.1IP address assigned by ISPA=192.168.1.33B=192.168.1.34C=192.168.1.35
Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT)VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide166
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 167CHAPTER 11Dynamic DNS Setup11.1 Overview DNSDNS (Domain Name System) is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a machine before you can access it. In addition to the system DNS server(s), each WAN interface (service) is set to have its own static or dynamic DNS server list. You can configure a DNS static route to forward DNS queries for certain domain names through a specific WAN interface to its DNS server(s). The Device uses a system DNS server (in the order you specify in the Broa dba nd screen) to resolve domain names that do not match any DNS routing entry. After the Device receives a DNS reply from a DNS server, it creates a new entry for the resolved IP address in the routing table.Dynamic DNSDynamic DNS allows you to update your current dynamic IP address with one or many dynamic DNS services so that anyone can contact you (in NetMeeting, CU-SeeMe, etc.). You can also access your FTP server or Web site on your own computer using a domain name (for instance myhost.dhs.org, where myhost is a name of your choice) that will never change instead of using an IP address that changes each time you reconnect. Your friends or relatives will always be able to call you even if they don't know your IP address.First of all, you need to have registered a dynamic DNS account with www.dyndns.org. This is for people with a dynamic IP from their ISP or DHCP server that would still like to have a domain name. The Dynamic DNS service provider will give you a password or key. 11.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter•Use the DN S Ent ry screen to view, configure, or remove DNS routes (Section 11.2 on page 168).•Use the Dyna m ic D N S screen to enable DDNS and configure the DDNS settings on the Device (Section 11.3 on page 169).
Chapter 11 Dynamic DNS SetupVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide16811.1.2 What You Need To KnowDYNDNS WildcardEnabling the wildcard feature for your host causes *.yourhost.dyndns.org to be aliased to the same IP address as yourhost.dyndns.org. This feature is useful if you want to be able to use, for example, www.yourhost.dyndns.org and still reach your hostname.If you have a private WAN IP address, then you cannot use Dynamic DNS.11.2 The DNS Entry ScreenUse this screen to view and configure DNS routes on the Device. Click Ne t w ork Se t t ing > D N S to open the D N S Ent ry screen.Figure 88 Network Setting > DNS > DNS EntryThe following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 65 Network Setting > DNS > DNS EntryLABEL DESCRIPTIONAdd new DNS entryClick this to create a new DNS entry.#This is the index number of the entry.Hostname This indicates the host name or domain name.IP Address This indicates the IP address assigned to this computer.Modify/Delete Click the Ed it icon to edit the rule.Click the De le t e icon to delete an existing rule.
Chapter 11 Dynamic DNS SetupVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 16911.2.1 Add/Edit DNS EntryYou can manually add or edit the Device’s DNS name and IP address entry. Click Add new D N S e nt r y in the DN S En t r y screen or the Ed it icon next to the entry you want to edit. The screen shown next appears.Figure 89 DNS Entry: Add/EditThe following table describes the labels in this screen. 11.3 The Dynamic DNS ScreenUse this screen to change your Device’s DDNS. Click Net w ork Se t t ing > DN S > Dynam ic D N S. The screen appears as shown.Figure 90 Network Setting > DNS > Dynamic DNSTable 66 DNS Entry: Add/EditLABEL DESCRIPTIONHost Name Enter the host name of the DNS entry.IP Address Enter the IP address of the DNS entry.Apply Click Apply to save your changes.Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Chapter 11 Dynamic DNS SetupVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide170The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 67 Network Setting > DNS > > Dynamic DNSLABEL DESCRIPTIONDynamic DNS Select En a ble to use dynamic DNS.Service ProviderSelect your Dynamic DNS service provider from the drop-down list box.Hostname Type the domain name assigned to your Device by your Dynamic DNS provider.You can specify up to two host names in the field separated by a comma (",").Username Type your user name.Password Type the password assigned to you.Email If you select TZO in the Ser vice Pr ov ider field, enter the user name you used to register for this service.Key If you select TZO in the Se r v ice Pr ovide r field, enter the password you used to register for this service.Apply Click Apply to save your changes.Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 171CHAPTER 12Interface Group12.1 OverviewBy default, all LAN and WAN interfaces on the Device are in the same group and can communicate with each other. Create interface groups to have the Device assign the IP addresses in different domains to different groups. Each group acts as an independent network on the Device. This lets devices connected to an interface group’s LAN interfaces communicate through the interface group’s WAN or LAN interfaces but not other WAN or LAN interfaces.12.1.1 What You Can Do in this ChapterThe I nt erface Gr ou p screens let you create multiple networks on the Device (Section 12.2 on page 171).12.2 The Interface Group ScreenYou can manually add a LAN interface to a new group. Alternatively, you can have the Device automatically add the incoming traffic and the LAN interface on which traffic is received to an interface group when its DHCP Vendor ID option information matches one listed for the interface group. Use the LAN screen to configure the private IP addresses the DHCP server on the Device assigns to the clients in the default and/or user-defined groups. If you set the Device to assign IP addresses based on the client’s DHCP Vendor ID option information, you must enable DHCP server and configure LAN TCP/IP settings for both the default and user-defined groups. See Chapter 7 on page 101 for more information.
Chapter 12 Interface GroupVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide172In the following example, the client that sends packets with the DHCP Vendor ID option set to MSFT 5.0 (meaning it is a Windows 2000 DHCP client) is assigned the IP address 192.168.2.2 and uses the WAN VDSL_PoE/ppp0.1 interface.Figure 91 Interface Grouping ApplicationClick N et w or k Se t t ing > I nt e rface Gr oup to open the following screen. Figure 92 Network Setting > Interface Group The following table describes the fields in this screen. 12.2.1 Interface Group ConfigurationClick the Add N ew I nt erfa ce Group button in the I nt e r fa ce Group screen to open the following screen. Use this screen to create a new interface group. Table 68 Network Setting > Interface GroupLABEL DESCRIPTIONAdd New Interface GroupClick this button to create a new interface group.Group Name This shows the descriptive name of the group.WAN Interface This shows the WAN interfaces in the group.LAN Interfaces This shows the LAN interfaces in the group.Criteria This shows the filtering criteria for the group.Modify/Delete Click the Dele t e icon to remove the group.Add Click this button to create a new group.Default: ETH 2~4Internet192.168.1.x/24192.168.2.x/24VDSL_PoE/ppp0.1eth10.0DHCP Vendor ID option: MSFT 5.0
Chapter 12 Interface GroupVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 173Note: An interface can belong to only one group at a time.Figure 93 Interface Group Configuration The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 69 Interface Group ConfigurationLABEL DESCRIPTIONGroup Name Enter a name to identify this group. You can enter up to 30 characters. You can use letters, numbers, hyphens (-) and underscores (_). Spaces are not allowed.WAN Interface used in the groupingSelect the WAN interface this group uses. The group can have up to one PTM interface, up to one ATM interface and up to one ETH interface.Select N on e to not add a WAN interface to this group.Grouped LAN InterfacesAvailable LAN InterfacesSelect one or more LAN interfaces (Ethernet LAN, HPNA or wireless LAN) in the Ava ila ble LAN I n t e r fa ces list and use the left arrow to move them to the Grou pe d LAN I nt er face s list to add the interfaces to this group.To remove a LAN or wireless LAN interface from the Grouped LAN I nt e rfaces, use the right-facing arrow.Automatically Add Clients With the following DHCP Vendor IDsClick Add to identify LAN hosts to add to the interface group by criteria such as the type of the hardware or firmware. See Section 12.2.2 on page 174 for more information.#This shows the index number of the rule.
Chapter 12 Interface GroupVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide17412.2.2 Interface Grouping CriteriaClick the Add button in the I nt er fa ce Grouping Configura t ion screen to open the following screen.Figure 94 Interface Grouping Criteria The following table describes the fields in this screen. Filter Criteria This shows the filtering criteria. The LAN interface on which the matched traffic is received will belong to this group automatically.WildCard SupportThis shows if wildcard on DHCP option 60 is enabled.Remove Click the Re m ove icon to delete this rule from the Device.Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Device.Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.Table 69 Interface Group Configuration (continued)LABEL DESCRIPTIONTable 70 Interface Grouping CriteriaLABEL DESCRIPTIONSource MAC AddressEnter the source MAC address of the packet.DHCP Option 60Select this option and enter the Vendor Class Identifier (Option 60) of the matched traffic, such as the type of the hardware or firmware.Enable wildcard on DHCP option 60 optionSelect this option to be able to use wildcards in the Vendor Class Identifier configured for DHCP option 60.DHCP Option 61Select this and enter the device identity of the matched traffic.
Chapter 12 Interface GroupVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 175IAID Enter the Identity Association Identifier (IAID) of the device, for example, the WAN connection index number.DUID type Select D UI D- LLT (DUID Based on Link-layer Address Plus Time) to enter the hardware type, a time value and the MAC address of the device.Select D UI D - EN (DUID Assigned by Vendor Based upon Enterprise Number) to enter the vendor’s registered enterprise number.Select D UI D- LL (DUID Based on Link-layer Address) to enter the device’s hardware type and hardware address (MAC address) in the following fields.Select Ot he r to enter any string that identifies the device in the DUID field.DHCP Option 125Select this and enter vendor specific information of the matched traffic.Enterprise Number Enter the vendor’s 32-bit enterprise number registered with the IANA (Internet Assigned Numbers Authority).Manufacturer OUI Specify the vendor’s OUI (Organization Unique Identifier). It is usually the first three bytes of the MAC address.Product Class Enter the product class of the device.Model Name Enter the model name of the device.Serial Number Enter the serial number of the device.Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Device.Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.Table 70 Interface Grouping Criteria (continued)LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 12 Interface GroupVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide176
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 177CHAPTER 13USB Service13.1 Overview The Device has a USB port used to share files via a USB memory stick or a USB hard drive. In the USB Se r v ice screens, you can enable file-sharing server, media server, and printer server.13.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter•Use the File Sh a ring screen to enable file-sharing server (Section 13.2 on page 178). •Use the Media Se r ve r screen to enable or disable the sharing of media files (Section 13.3 on page 180).•Use the Pr int er Server screen to enable the print server (Section 13.4 on page 181).13.1.2 What You Need To KnowThe following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter.13.1.2.1 About File SharingWorkgroup nameThis is the name given to a set of computers that are connected on a network and share resources such as a printer or files. Windows automatically assigns the workgroup name when you set up a network. SharesWhen settings are set to default, each USB device connected to the Device is given a folder, called a “share”. If a USB hard drive connected to the Device has more than one partition, then each partition will be allocated a share. You can also configure a “share” to be a sub-folder or file on the USB device.File SystemsA file system is a way of storing and organizing files on your hard drive and storage device. Often different operating systems such as Windows or Linux have different file systems. The file sharing feature on your Device supports File Allocation Table (FAT) and FAT32. Common Internet File SystemThe Device uses Common Internet File System (CIFS) protocol for its file sharing functions. CIFS compatible computers can access the USB file storage devices connected to the Device. CIFS
Chapter 13 USB ServiceVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide178protocol is supported on Microsoft Windows, Linux Samba and other operating systems (refer to your systems specifications for CIFS compatibility). 13.1.2.2 About Printer ServerPrint ServerThis is a computer or other device which manages one or more printers, and which sends print jobs to each printer from the computer itself or other devices.Operating SystemAn operating system (OS) is the interface which helps you manage a computer. Common examples are Microsoft Windows, Mac OS or Linux.TCP/IPTCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/ Internet Protocol) is a set of communications protocols that most of the Internet runs on. PortA port maps a network service such as http to a process running on your computer, such as a process run by your web browser. When traffic from the Internet is received on your computer, the port number is used to identify which process running on your computer it is intended for. Supported OSsYour operating system must support TCP/IP ports for printing and be compatible with the RAW (port 9100) protocol.The following OSs support Device’s printer sharing feature.• Microsoft Windows 95, Windows 98 SE (Second Edition), Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP or Macintosh OS X. 13.2 The File Sharing ScreenYou can share files on a USB memory stick or hard drive connected to your Device with users on your network.
Chapter 13 USB ServiceVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 179The following figure is an overview of the Device’s file server feature. Computers A and B can access files on a USB device (C) which is connected to the Device.Figure 95 File Sharing OverviewThe Device will not be able to join the workgroup if your local area network has restrictions set up that do not allow devices to join a workgroup. In this case, contact your network administrator.13.2.1 Before You BeginMake sure the Device is connected to your network and turned on.1Connect the USB device to one of the Device’s USB port. Make sure the Device is connected to your network.2The Device detects the USB device and makes its contents available for browsing. If you are connecting a USB hard drive that comes with an external power supply, make sure it is connected to an appropriate power source that is on.Note: If your USB device cannot be detected by the Device, see the troubleshooting for suggestions. Use this screen to set up file sharing using the Device. To access this screen, click Net w or k Set t ing > USB Se rvice > File Shar ing.Figure 96 Network Setting > USB Service > File SharingABC
Chapter 13 USB ServiceVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide180Each field is described in the following table.13.3 The Media Server ScreenThe media server feature lets anyone on your network play video, music, and photos from the USB storage device connected to your Device (without having to copy them to another computer). The Device can function as a DLNA-compliant media server. The Device streams files to DLNA-compliant media clients (like Windows Media Player). The Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is a group of personal computer and electronics companies that works to make products compatible in a home network.The Device media server enables you to:• Publish all shares for everyone to play media files in the USB storage device connected to the Device.• Use hardware-based media clients like the DMA-2500 to play the files. Note: Anyone on your network can play the media files in the published shares. No user name and password or other form of security is used. The media server is enabled by default with the video, photo, and music shares published. To change your Device’s media server settings, click Net w or k Set t ing > USB Ser vice > Me dia Serve r. The screen appears as shown.Figure 97 Network Setting > USB Service > Media ServerTable 71 Network Setting > Home Networking > File SharingLABEL DESCRIPTIONFile Sharing ServicesSelect Enable to activate file sharing through the Device. Host Name Enter the host name on the share.Apply Click Apply to save your changes.Cancel Click Cance l to restore your previously saved settings.
Chapter 13 USB ServiceVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 181The following table describes the labels in this menu.13.4 The Printer Server ScreenThe Device allows you to share a USB printer on your LAN. You can do this by connecting a USB printer to one of the USB ports on the Device and then configuring a TCP/IP port on the computers connected to your network. Figure 98 Sharing a USB Printer13.4.1 Before You BeginTo configure the print server you need the following:• Your Device must be connected to your computer and any other devices on your network. The USB printer must be connected to your Device.• A USB printer with the driver already installed on your computer.• The computers on your network must have the printer software already installed before they can create a TCP/IP port for printing via the network. Follow your printer manufacturers instructions on how to install the printer software on your computer. Note: Your printer’s installation instructions may ask that you connect the printer to your computer. Connect your printer to the Device instead.Use this screen to enable or disable sharing of a USB printer via your Device. Table 72 Network Setting > USB Service > Media ServerLABEL DESCRIPTIONMedia Server Select Enable to have the Device function as a DLNA-compliant media server.Enable the media server to let (DLNA-compliant) media clients on your network play media files located in the shares. Interface Select the interface on which you want to enable the media server function.Media Library PathEnter the path clients use to access the media files on a USB storage device connected to the Device.Apply Click Apply to save your changes.Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
Chapter 13 USB ServiceVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide182To access this screen, click Net w ork Se t t in g > USB Ser vice > Pr int er Ser ve r.Figure 99 Network Setting > USB Service > Printer ServerThe following table describes the labels in this menu.Table 73 Network Setting > USB Service > Print ServerLABEL DESCRIPTIONPrinter Server Select Ena ble to have the Device share a USB printer.Printer Name Enter the name of the printer.Make and model Enter the manufacturer and model number of the printer.Printer Name This displays the system name for the printer.Apply Click Apply to save your changes.Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 183CHAPTER 14Firewall14.1 OverviewThis chapter shows you how to enable and configure the Device’s security settings. Use the firewall to protect your Device and network from attacks by hackers on the Internet and control access to it. By default the firewall:• allows traffic that originates from your LAN computers to go to all other networks. • blocks traffic that originates on other networks from going to the LAN. The following figure illustrates the default firewall action. User A can initiate an IM (Instant Messaging) session from the LAN to the WAN (1). Return traffic for this session is also allowed (2). However other traffic initiated from the WAN is blocked (3 and 4).Figure 100 Default Firewall Action14.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter•Use the Gener a l screen to configure the security level of the firewall on the Device (Section 14.2 on page 185).•Use the Ser vice screen to add or remove predefined Internet services and configure firewall rules (Section 14.3 on page 185).•Use the Access Cont rol screen to view and configure incoming/outgoing filtering rules (Section 14.4 on page 188). •Use the DoS screen to activate protection against Denial of Service (DoS) attacks (.Section 14.5 on page 190).WANLAN3412A
Chapter 14 FirewallVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide18414.1.2 What You Need to KnowSYN AttackA SYN attack floods a targeted system with a series of SYN packets. Each packet causes the targeted system to issue a SYN-ACK response. While the targeted system waits for the ACK that follows the SYN-ACK, it queues up all outstanding SYN-ACK responses on a backlog queue. SYN-ACKs are moved off the queue only when an ACK comes back or when an internal timer terminates the three-way handshake. Once the queue is full, the system will ignore all incoming SYN requests, making the system unavailable for legitimate users.DoSDenials of Service (DoS) attacks are aimed at devices and networks with a connection to the Internet. Their goal is not to steal information, but to disable a device or network so users no longer have access to network resources. The ZyXEL Device is pre-configured to automatically detect and thwart all known DoS attacks.DDoSA DDoS attack is one in which multiple compromised systems attack a single target, thereby causing denial of service for users of the targeted system.LAND AttackIn a LAND attack, hackers flood SYN packets into the network with a spoofed source IP address of the target system. This makes it appear as if the host computer sent the packets to itself, making the system unavailable while the target system tries to respond to itself.Ping of DeathPing of Death uses a "ping" utility to create and send an IP packet that exceeds the maximum 65,536 bytes of data allowed by the IP specification. This may cause systems to crash, hang or reboot.SPIStateful Packet Inspection (SPI) tracks each connection crossing the firewall and makes sure it is valid. Filtering decisions are based not only on rules but also context. For example, traffic from the WAN may only be allowed to cross the firewall in response to a request from the LAN.
Chapter 14 FirewallVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 18514.2 The Firewall ScreenUse this screen to set the security level of the firewall on the Device. Firewall rules are grouped based on the direction of travel of packets to which they apply. Click Se curit y > Fir e w a ll to display the Gene r al screen. Figure 101 Security > Firewall > GeneralThe following table describes the labels in this screen.14.3 The Service Screen You can configure customized services and port numbers in the Se r v ice screen. For a comprehensive list of port numbers and services, visit the IANA (Internet Assigned Number Authority) website. Table 74 Security > Firewall > GeneralLABEL DESCRIPTIONFirewall Select Ena ble to activate the firewall feature on the Device.Easy Select Ea sy to allow LAN to WAN and WAN to LAN packet directions.Medium Select Me dium to allow LAN to WAN but deny WAN to LAN packet directions.High Select H igh to deny LAN to WAN and WAN to LAN packet directions.Apply Click Apply to save your changes.Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
Chapter 14 FirewallVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide186Click Se curit y > Fire w a ll > Se r vice to display the following screen.Figure 102 Security > Firewall > Service The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 75 Security > Firewall > ServiceLABEL DESCRIPTIONAdd new service entryClick this to add a new service.Name This is the name of your customized service.Description This is the description of your customized service.Ports/Protocol NumberThis shows the IP protocol (TCP, UDP, I CM P, or TCP/ UDP) and the port number or range of ports that defines your customized service. Ot h e r and the protocol number displays if the service uses another IP protocol.Modify/Delete Click the Ed it icon to edit the entry.Click the D e let e icon to remove this entry.
Chapter 14 FirewallVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 18714.3.1 Add/Edit a Service Use this screen to add a customized service rule that you can use in the firewall’s ACL rule configuration. Click Add new se r vice e nt r y or the edit icon next to an existing service rule in the Service screen to display the following screen.Figure 103 Service: Add/EditThe following table describes the labels in this screen.Table 76 Service: Add/EditLABEL DESCRIPTIONProtocol Choose the IP protocol (TCP, UD P, I CM P, or O t he r ) that defines your customized port from the drop-down list box. Select Ot h e r to be able to enter a protocol number.Source/Destination PortThese fields are displayed if you select TCP or UD P as the IP port. Select Single to specify one port only or Ran ge to specify a span of ports that define your customized service. If you select An y, the service is applied to all ports.Type a single port number or the range of port numbers that define your customized service.Protocol NumberThis field is displayed if you select Ot h e r as the protocol.Enter the protocol number of your customized port. Add Click this to add the protocol to the Rule List below.Rule ListProtocol This is the IP port (TCP, UD P, I CMP, or Ot h er ) that defines your customized port.Ports/Protocol NumberFor TCP, UD P, I CM P, or TCP/ UD P protocol rules this shows the port number or range that defines the custom service. For other IP protocol rules this shows the protocol number. Modify/Delete Click the Dele t e icon to remove the rule.
Chapter 14 FirewallVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide18814.4 The Access Control ScreenClick Secur it y > Fir e w all > Acce ss Con t r ol to display the following screen. This screen displays a list of the configured incoming or outgoing filtering rules. Figure 104 Security > Firewall > Access Control The following table describes the labels in this screen. Service Name Enter a unique name (up to 32 printable English keyboard characters, including spaces) for your customized port. Service DescriptionEnter a description for your customized port.Apply Click Apply to save your changes.Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.Table 76 Service: Add/Edit (continued)LABEL DESCRIPTIONTable 77 Security > Firewall > Access ControlLABEL DESCRIPTIONAdd new ACL ruleClick this to go to add a filter rule for incoming or outgoing IP traffic.#This is the index number of the entry.Name This displays the name of the rule.Src IP This displays the source IP addresses to which this rule applies. Please note that a blank source address is equivalent to An y.Dst IP This displays the destination IP addresses to which this rule applies. Please note that a blank destination address is equivalent to An y.Service This displays the transport layer protocol that defines the service and the direction of traffic to which this rule applies. Action This field displays whether the rule silently discards packets (DROP), discards packets and sends a TCP reset packet or an ICMP destination-unreachable message to the sender (REJECT) or allows the passage of packets (ACCEPT).Modify/Delete Click the Ed it icon to edit the rule.Click the D e let e icon to delete an existing rule. Note that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action.Click the M ove To icon to change the order of the rule. Enter the number in the # field.
Chapter 14 FirewallVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 18914.4.1 Add/Edit an ACL Rule Click Add ne w ACL rule or the Ed it icon next to an existing ACL rule in the Access Cont rol screen. The following screen displays.Figure 105 Access Control: Add/EditThe following table describes the labels in this screen.Table 78 Access Control: Add/EditLABEL DESCRIPTIONFilter Name Enter a descriptive name of up to 16 alphanumeric characters, not including spaces, underscores, and dashes. You must enter the filter name to add an ACL rule. This field is read-only if you are editing the ACL rule.Order Select the order of the ACL rule.Select Source DeviceSelect the source device to which the ACL rule applies. If you select Specific I P Addre ss, enter the source IP address in the field below.Source IP AddressEnter the source IP address.Select Destination DeviceSelect the destination device to which the ACL rule applies. If you select Specific I P Addr e ss, enter the destiniation IP address in the field below.Destination IP AddressEnter the destination IP address.
Chapter 14 FirewallVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide19014.5 The DoS ScreenDoS (Denial of Service) attacks can flood your Internet connection with invalid packets and connection requests, using so much bandwidth and so many resources that Internet access becomes unavailable. Use the DoS screen to activate protection against DoS attacks. Click Secur it y > Firew all > DoS to display the following screen. Figure 106 Security > Firewall > DoSIP Type Select whether your IP type is I Pv4 or I Pv6 . Select Protocol Select the transport layer protocol that defines your customized port from the drop-down list box. The specific protocol rule sets you add in the Securit y > Fire w a ll > Service > Add screen display in this list. If you want to configure a customized protocol, select Spe cific Se r vice.Protocol This field is displayed only when you select Spe cific Pr ot ocol in Se lect Pr ot ocol.Choose the IP port (TCP/ UDP, TCP, UDP, I CMP, or I CM Pv6 ) that defines your customized port from the drop-down list box.Custom Source PortThis field is displayed only when you select Spe cific Pr ot ocol in Sele ct Pr ot ocol.Enter a single port number or the range of port numbers of the source.Custom Destination PortThis field is displayed only when you select Spe cific Pr ot ocol in Sele ct Pr ot ocol.Enter a single port number or the range of port numbers of the destination.Policy Use the drop-down list box to select whether to discard (DROP), deny and send an ICMP destination-unreachable message to the sender of (REJECT) or allow the passage of (ACCEPT) packets that match this rule.Direction Use the drop-down list box to select the direction of traffic to which this rule applies.Enable Rate LimitSelect this check box to set a limit on the upstream/downstream transmission rate for the specified protocol.Specify how many packets per minute or second the transmission rate is.Scheduler Rules Select a schedule rule for this ACL rule form the drop-down list box. You can configure a new schedule rule by click Add N ew Ru le . This will bring you to the Secur it y > Sch e duler Rule s screen.Apply Click Apply to save your changes.Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.Table 78 Access Control: Add/Edit (continued)LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 14 FirewallVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 191The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 79 Security > Firewall > DoSLABEL DESCRIPTIONDoS Protection BlockingSelect Enable to enable protection against DoS attacks.Deny Ping ResponseSelect Enable to block ping request packets. Apply Click Apply to save your changes.Cancel Click Cance l to exit this screen without saving.
Chapter 14 FirewallVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide192
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 193CHAPTER 15MAC Filter15.1 Overview You can configure the Device to permit access to clients based on their MAC addresses in the MAC Filt e r screen. This applies to wired and wireless connections. Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. You need to know the MAC addresses of the devices to configure this screen.15.2 The MAC Filter ScreenUse this screen to allow wireless and LAN clients access to the Device. Click Secur it y > MAC Filt e r. The screen appears as shown.Figure 107 Security > MAC Filter
Chapter 15 MAC FilterVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide194The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 80 Security > MAC FilterLABEL DESCRIPTIONMAC Address Filter Select Enable to activate the MAC filter function.Set This is the index number of the MAC address.Allow Select Allow to permit access to the Device. MAC addresses not listed will be denied access to the Device. If you clear this, the MAC Address field for this set clears.Host name Enter the host name of the wireless or LAN clients that are allowed access to the Device.MAC Address Enter the MAC addresses of the wireless or LAN clients that are allowed access to the Device in these address fields. Enter the MAC addresses in a valid MAC address format, that is, six hexadecimal character pairs, for example, 12:34:56:78:9a:bc.Apply Click Apply to save your changes.Cancel Click Ca nce l to restore your previously saved settings.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 195CHAPTER 16Parental Control16.1 OverviewParental control allows you to block web sites with the specific URL. You can also define time periods and days during which the Device performs parental control on a specific user. 16.2 The Parental Control ScreenUse this screen to enable parental control, view the parental control rules and schedules.Click Se cur it y > Pa r e nt al Cont r ol to open the following screen. Figure 108 Security > Parental Control The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 81 Security > Parental ControlLABEL DESCRIPTIONParental ControlSelect Enable to activate parental control.Add new PCP Click this if you want to configure a new parental control rule.#This shows the index number of the rule.Status This indicates whether the rule is active or not.A yellow bulb signifies that this rule is active. A gray bulb signifies that this rule is not active.PCP Name This shows the name of the rule.
Chapter 16 Parental ControlVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide19616.2.1 Add/Edit a Parental Control RuleClick Add ne w PCP in the Pa r e nt a l Cont r ol screen to add a new rule or click the Edit icon next to an existing rule to edit it. Use this screen to configure a restricted access schedule and/or URL filtering settings to block the users on your network from accessing certain web sites.Figure 109 Parental Control Rule: Add/Edit Home Network User (MAC)This shows the MAC address of the LAN user’s computer to which this rule applies.Internet Access ScheduleThis shows the day(s) and time on which parental control is enabled.Network ServiceThis shows whether the network service is configured. If not, N on e will be shown.Website Block This shows whether the website block is configured. If not, N on e will be shown.Modify/Delete Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the rule.Click the D ele t e icon to delete an existing rule.Apply Click Apply to save your changes.Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.Table 81 Security > Parental Control (continued)LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 16 Parental ControlVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 197The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 82 Parental Control Rule: Add/EditLABEL DESCRIPTIONGeneralActive Select the checkbox to activate this parental control rule.Parental Control Profile NameEnter a descriptive name for the rule.Home Network UserSelect the LAN user that you want to apply this rule to from the drop-down list box. If you select Cu st om , enter the LAN user’s MAC address. If you select All, the rule applies to all LAN users.Internet Access ScheduleDay Select check boxes for the days that you want the Device to perform parental control. Time Drag the time bar to define the time that the LAN user is allowed access. Network ServiceNetwork Service Setting If you select Block, the Device prohibits the users from viewing the Web sites with the URLs listed below.If you select Allow , the Device blocks access to all URLs except ones listed below.Add new serviceClick this to show a screen in which you can add a new service rule. You can configure the Ser vice N a m e , Pr ot o col, and N a m e of the new rule.#This shows the index number of the rule. Select the checkbox next to the rule to activate it.Service Name This shows the name of the rule.Protocol:Port This shows the protocol and the port of the rule.Modify/Delete Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the rule.Click the D ele t e icon to delete an existing rule.Blocked Site/URL KeywordClick Add to show a screen to enter the URL of web site or URL keyword to which the Device blocks access. Click De le t e to remove it.Apply Click this button to save your settings back to the Device.Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
Chapter 16 Parental ControlVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide198
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 199CHAPTER 17Scheduler Rule17.1 OverviewYou can define time periods and days during which the Device performs scheduled rules of certain features (such as Firewall Access Control) in the Scheduler Rule screen. 17.2 The Scheduler Rule ScreenUse this screen to view, add, or edit time schedule rules.Click Securit y > Sche dule r Rule to open the following screen. Figure 110 Security > Scheduler Rule The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 83 Security > Scheduler RuleLABEL DESCRIPTIONAdd new rule Click this to create a new rule.#This is the index number of the entry.Rule Name This shows the name of the rule.Day This shows the day(s) on which this rule is enabled.Time This shows the period of time on which this rule is enabled.Description This shows the description of this rule.Modify/Delete Click the Ed it icon to edit the schedule.Click the De le t e icon to delete a scheduler rule.Note: You cannot delete a scheduler rule once it is applied to a certain feature.
Chapter 17 Scheduler RuleVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide20017.2.1 Add/Edit a ScheduleClick the Add button in the Schedu ler Rule screen or click the Edit icon next to a schedule rule to open the following screen. Use this screen to configure a restricted access schedule. Figure 111 Scheduler Rule: Add/Edit The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 84 Scheduler Rule: Add/Edit LABEL DESCRIPTIONRule Name Enter a name (up to 31 printable English keyboard characters, not including spaces) for this schedule. Day Select check boxes for the days that you want the Device to perform this scheduler rule. Time if Day RangeEnter the time period of each day, in 24-hour format, during which the rule will be enforced. Description Enter a description for this scheduler rule.Apply Click Apply to save your changes.Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 201CHAPTER 18Certificates18.1 OverviewThe Device can use certificates (also called digital IDs) to authenticate users. Certificates are based on public-private key pairs. A certificate contains the certificate owner’s identity and public key. Certificates provide a way to exchange public keys for use in authentication. 18.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter•The Local Ce r t ifica t e s screen lets you generate certification requests and import the Device's CA-signed certificates (Section 18.4 on page 205).•The Tr uste d CA screen lets you save the certificates of trusted CAs to the Device (Section 18.4 on page 205).18.2 What You Need to KnowThe following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter.Certification Authority A Certification Authority (CA) issues certificates and guarantees the identity of each certificate owner. There are commercial certification authorities like CyberTrust or VeriSign and government certification authorities. The certification authority uses its private key to sign certificates. Anyone can then use the certification authority's public key to verify the certificates. You can use the Device to generate certification requests that contain identifying information and public keys and then send the certification requests to a certification authority.
Chapter 18 CertificatesVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide20218.3 The Local Certificates ScreenClick Secur it y > Ce r t if ica t es to open the Loca l Cer t ificat es screen. This is the Device’s summary list of certificates and certification requests. Figure 112 Security > Certificates > Local Certificates The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 85 Security > Certificates > Local CertificatesLABEL DESCRIPTIONPrivate Key is protected by a password?Select the check box and enter the private key into the text box to store it on the Device. The private key should not exceed 63 ASCII characters (not including spaces). Browse... Click this to find the certificate file you want to upload. Import Certificate Click this button to save the certificate that you have enrolled from a certification authority from your computer to the Device.Create Certificate RequestClick this button to go to the screen where you can have the Device generate a certification request.Current File This field displays the name used to identify this certificate. It is recommended that you give each certificate a unique name. Subject This field displays identifying information about the certificate’s owner, such as CN (Common Name), OU (Organizational Unit or department), O (Organization or company) and C (Country). It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject information. Issuer This field displays identifying information about the certificate’s issuing certification authority, such as a common name, organizational unit or department, organization or company and country.Valid From This field displays the date that the certificate becomes applicable. The text displays in red and includes a N ot Ye t V a lid! message if the certificate has not yet become applicable.Valid To This field displays the date that the certificate expires. The text displays in red and includes an Expir ing! or Expir ed! message if the certificate is about to expire or has already expired.Modify/Delete Click the View icon to open a screen with an in-depth list of information about the certificate (or certification request).For a certification request, click Loa d Signed to import the signed certificate.Click the Rem ove icon to delete the certificate (or certification request). You cannot delete a certificate that one or more features is configured to use.
Chapter 18 CertificatesVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 20318.3.1 Create Certificate Request Click Se cur it y > Cer t if icat e s > Local Ce rt ificat e s and then Creat e Cert ificat e Re quest to open the following screen. Use this screen to have the Device generate a certification request.Figure 113 Create Certificate RequestThe following table describes the labels in this screen. After you click Apply, the following screen displays to notify you that you need to get the certificate request signed by a Certificate Authority. If you already have, click Load_ Signe d to import the signed certificate into the Device. Otherwise click Ba ck to return to the Local Cer t ifica t e s screen. Table 86 Create Certificate RequestLABEL DESCRIPTIONCertificate NameType up to 63 ASCII characters (not including spaces) to identify this certificate. Common Name Select Au t o to have the Device configure this field automatically. Or select Cu st o m iz e to enter it manually. Type the IP address (in dotted decimal notation), domain name or e-mail address in the field provided. The domain name or e-mail address can be up to 63 ASCII characters. The domain name or e-mail address is for identification purposes only and can be any string.Organization NameType up to 63 characters to identify the company or group to which the certificate owner belongs. You may use any character, including spaces, but the Device drops trailing spaces.State/Province NameType up to 32 characters to identify the state or province where the certificate owner is located. You may use any character, including spaces, but the Device drops trailing spaces.Country/Region NameSelect a country to identify the nation where the certificate owner is located. Apply Click Apply to save your changes.Cancel Click Cance l to exit this screen without saving.
Chapter 18 CertificatesVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide204Figure 114 Certificate Request Created18.3.2 Load Signed Certificate After you create a certificate request and have it signed by a Certificate Authority, in the Local Ce r t ifica t e s screen click the certificate request’s Loa d Signed icon to import the signed certificate into the Device.
Chapter 18 CertificatesVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 205Note: You must remove any spaces from the certificate’s filename before you can import it.Figure 115 Load Signed Certificate The following table describes the labels in this screen. 18.4 The Trusted CA ScreenClick Securit y > Cert ifica t es > Tr usted CA to open the following screen. This screen displays a summary list of certificates of the certification authorities that you have set the Device to accept as trusted. The Device accepts any valid certificate signed by a certification authority on this list as Table 87 Load Signed CertificateLABEL DESCRIPTIONCertificate NameThis is the name of the signed certificate. Certificate Copy and paste the signed certificate into the text box to store it on the Device.Apply Click Apply to save your changes.Cancel Click Cance l to exit this screen without saving.
Chapter 18 CertificatesVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide206being trustworthy; thus you do not need to import any certificate that is signed by one of these certification authorities. Figure 116 Security > Certificates > Trusted CA The following table describes the fields in this screen. 18.4.1 View Trusted CA CertificateClick the View icon in the Tr uste d CA screen to open the following screen. Use this screen to view in-depth information about the certification authority’s certificate.Figure 117 Trusted CA: View Table 88 Security > Certificates > Trusted CALABEL DESCRIPTIONImport CertificateClick this button to open a screen where you can save the certificate of a certification authority that you trust to the Device.# This is the index number of the entry.Name This field displays the name used to identify this certificate. Subject This field displays information that identifies the owner of the certificate, such as Common Name (CN), OU (Organizational Unit or department), Organization (O), State (ST) and Country (C). It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject information.Type This field displays general information about the certificate. ca means that a Certification Authority signed the certificate. Modify/Delete Click the Vie w icon to open a screen with an in-depth list of information about the certificate (or certification request).Click the Rem ov e button to delete the certificate (or certification request). You cannot delete a certificate that one or more features is configured to use.
Chapter 18 CertificatesVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 207The following table describes the fields in this screen. 18.4.2 Import Trusted CA CertificateClick the I m por t Cer t ificat e button in the Tr u st ed CA screen to open the following screen. The Device trusts any valid certificate signed by any of the imported trusted CA certificates.Figure 118 Trusted CA: Import Certificate The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 89 Trusted CA: ViewLABEL DESCRIPTIONName This field displays the identifying name of this certificate. The read-only text box displays the certificate in Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM) format. PEM uses base 64 to convert the binary certificate into a printable form. You can copy and paste the certificate into an e-mail to send to friends or colleagues or you can copy and paste the certificate into a text editor and save the file on a management computer for later distribution (via floppy disk for example).Back Click Back to return to the previous screen.Table 90 Trusted CA: Import CertificateLABEL DESCRIPTIONCertificate File PathType in the location of the certificate you want to upload in this field or click Brow se ... to find it. Enable Trusted CA for 802.1x AuthenticationIf you select this check box, the trusted CA will be used for 802.1x authentication. The selected trusted CA will be displayed in the N et w ork Set t in g > Br oa d ba n d > 8 0 2 .1 x : Edit screen.Certificate Copy and paste the certificate into the text box to store it on the Device.OK Click OK to save your changes.Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Chapter 18 CertificatesVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide208
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 209CHAPTER 19VPN19.1 OverviewA virtual private network (VPN) provides secure communications over the the Internet. Internet Protocol Security (IPSec) is a standards-based VPN that provides confidentiality, data integrity, and authentication. This chapter shows you how to configure the Device’s VPN settings.19.2 IPSec VPN19.2.1 The General ScreenUse this screen to view and manage your VPN tunnel policies. The following figure helps explain the main fields in the web configurator. Figure 119 IPSec Fields SummaryClick Se cur it y > V PN to open this screen as shown next.Figure 120 IPSec VPNLocal Network Remote NetworkVPN Tunnel
Chapter 19 VPNVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide210This screen contains the following fields:19.2.2 IPSec VPN: AddUse these settings to add or edit VPN policies. Click Secur it y > VPN > Add n e w conn e ction to open this screen as shown next.Table 91 IPSec VPNLABEL DESCRIPTIONAdd new connection Click this button to add an item to the list.Enable This displays if the VPN policy is enabled.Connection Name The name of the VPN connection.Remote Gateway This is the IP address of the remote IPSec router in the IKE SA.Local Addresses This displays the IP address(es) on the LAN behind your Device.Remote Addresses This displays the IP address(es) on the LAN behind the remote IPSec’s router.Delete Click the De le t e icon to delete an existing rule.
Chapter 19 VPNVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 211Figure 121 IPSec VPN: Add
Chapter 19 VPNVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide212This screen contains the following fields: Table 92 IPSec VPN: AddLABEL DESCRIPTIONIPSec SetupIPSec Connection NameEnter the name of the VPN connection.Tunnel Mode Select which protocol you want to use in the IPSec SA. Choices are:AH (RFC 2402) - provides integrity, authentication, sequence integrity (replay resistance), and non-repudiation but not encryption. If you select AH , you must select an Au t he n t ica t ion algorithm.ESP (RFC 2406) - provides encryption and the same services offered by AH, but its authentication is weaker. If you select ESP, you must select an En cr yp t ion algorithm and Authentication algorithm.Both AH and ESP increase processing requirements and latency (delay). The Device and remote IPSec router must use the same active protocol.Remote IPSec Gateway AddressEnter the IP address of the remote IPSec router in the IKE SA.LocalLocal Address Type Select Sin gle to have only one local LAN IP address use the VPN tunnel. Select Sub ne t to specify local LAN IP addresses by their subnet mask.IP Address for VPN If Sin gle is selected, enter a (static) IP address on the LAN behind your Device. If Subn et is selected, specify IP addresses on a network by their subnet mask by entering a (static) IP address on the LAN behind your Device. Then enter the subnet mask to identify the network address.IP Subnetmask If Subne t is selected, enter the subnet mask to identify the network address.RemoteRemote Address Type Select Sin gle to have only one remote LAN IP address use the VPN tunnel. Select Su bn e t to specify remote LAN IP addresses by their subnet mask.IP Address for VPN If Sin gle is selected, enter a (static) IP address on the LAN behind the remote IPSec’s router. If Subn et is selected, specify IP addresses on a network by their subnet mask by entering a (static) IP address on the LAN behind the remote IPSec’s router. Then enter the subnet mask to identify the network address.IP Subnetmask If Subne t is selected, enter the subnet mask to identify the network address.Security Protocol - AutoKey Exchange Method Select the key exchange method:Au t o( I KE) - Select this to use automatic IKE key management VPN connection policy.Man ual - Select this option to configure a VPN connection policy that uses a manual key instead of IKE key management. This may be useful if you have problems with IKE key management. Note: Only use manual key as a temporary solution, because it is not as secure as a regular IPSec SA.Authentication Method Select Pr e- Share d Key to use a pre-shared key for authentication, and type in your pre-shared key. A pre-shared key identifies a communicating party during a phase 1 IKE negotiation. It is called "pre-shared" because you have to share it with another party before you can communicate with them over a secure connection. Select Ce rt if ica t e to use a certificate for authentication.
Chapter 19 VPNVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 213Pre-Shared Key Type your pre-shared key in this field. A pre-shared key identifies a communicating party during a phase 1 IKE negotiation. Type from 8 to 31 case-sensitive ASCII characters or from 16 to 62 hexadecimal ("0-9", "A-F") characters. You must precede a hexadecimal key with a "0x” (zero x), which is not counted as part of the 16 to 62 character range for the key. For example, in "0x0123456789ABCDEF", “0x” denotes that the key is hexadecimal and “0123456789ABCDEF” is the key itself.Certificates If you use a certificate for authentication, select the certificates to use from the lists. You can import certificates in the Se cur it y > Cer t ifica t es screens.Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS) Select whether or not you want to enable Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS)PFS changes the root key that is used to generate encryption keys for each IPSec SA. The longer the key, the more secure the encryption, but also the longer it takes to encrypt and decrypt information. Both routers must use the same DH key group. Choices are:Diffie - H e llm an Group2 - use a 1024-bit random numberDiffie - H e llm an Group5 - use a 1536-bit random numberDiffie - H e llm an Group1 4 - use a 2048-bit random numberShow Advanced Settings Click this to display advanced settings.Advanced Setting - Phase 1Mode Select the negotiation mode to use to negotiate the IKE SA. Choices are:Main - this encrypts the Device’s and remote IPSec router’s identities but takes more time to establish the IKE SA.Aggr e ssive - this is faster but does not encrypt the identities.The Device and the remote IPSec router must use the same negotiation mode.Encryption Algorithm Select which key size and encryption algorithm to use in the IKE SA. Choices are:DES - a 56-bit key with the DES encryption algorithm3 DES - a 168-bit key with the DES encryption algorithmAES1 2 8 - a 128-bit key with the AES encryption algorithmAES1 9 6 - a 196-bit key with the AES encryption algorithmAES2 5 6 - a 256-bit key with the AES encryption algorithmThe Device and the remote IPSec router must use the same key size and encryption algorithm. Longer keys require more processing power, resulting in increased latency and decreased throughput.Integrity Algorithm Select which hash algorithm to use to authenticate packet data. Choices are MD 5 , SH A1 , SH A2 - 2 5 6 and SHA2 - 5 1 2 . SH A is generally considered stronger than MD5 , but it is also slower.Diffie-Hellman Group for Key Exchange Select which Diffie-Hellman key group you want to use for encryption keys. Choices for number of bits in the random number are: 768, 1024, 2048, 3072, 4096, 6144, 8192.The longer the key, the more secure the encryption, but also the longer it takes to encrypt and decrypt information. Both routers must use the same DH key group.Key Life Time Define the length of time before an IPSec SA automatically renegotiates in this field.A short SA Life Time increases security by forcing the two VPN gateways to update the encryption and authentication keys. However, every time the VPN tunnel renegotiates, all users accessing remote resources are temporarily disconnected. Table 92 IPSec VPN: AddLABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 19 VPNVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide214Phase 2Encryption Algorithm Select which key size and encryption algorithm to use in the IKE SA. Choices are:DES - a 56-bit key with the DES encryption algorithm3 DES - a 168-bit key with the DES encryption algorithmAES1 2 8 - a 128-bit key with the AES encryption algorithmAES1 9 6 - a 196-bit key with the AES encryption algorithmAES2 5 6 - a 256-bit key with the AES encryption algorithmN ULL - no encryption key or algorithmThe Device and the remote IPSec router must use the same key size and encryption algorithm. Longer keys require more processing power, resulting in increased latency and decreased throughput.Integrity Algorithm Select which hash algorithm to use to authenticate packet data. Choices are MD 5 , SH A1 . SH A is generally considered stronger than MD5 , but it is also slower.Diffie-Hellman Group for Key Exchange Select which Diffie-Hellman key group you want to use for encryption keys. Choices for number of bits in the random number are: 768, 1024, 2048, 3072, 4096, 6144, 8192.Key Life Time Define the length of time before an IPSec SA automatically renegotiates in this field.A short SA Life Time increases security by forcing the two VPN gateways to update the encryption and authentication keys. However, every time the VPN tunnel renegotiates, all users accessing remote resources are temporarily disconnected. DPD Active Enable Dead Peer Detection (DPD) Active check box if you want the Device to make sure the remote IPSec router is there before it transmits data through the IKE SA. The remote IPSec router must support DPD. If the remote IPSec router does not respond, the Device shuts down the IKE SA.Security Protocol - ManualKey Exchange Method Select the key exchange method:Au t o( I KE) - Select this to use automatic IKE key management VPN connection policy.Man ual - Select this option to configure a VPN connection policy that uses a manual key instead of IKE key management. This may be useful if you have problems with IKE key management. Note: Only use manual key as a temporary solution, because it is not as secure as a regular IPSec SA.Encryption Algorithm Select which key size and encryption algorithm to use in the IKE SA. Choices are:DES - a 56-bit key with the DES encryption algorithm3 DES - a 168-bit key with the DES encryption algorithmAES - AES encryption algorithmEncryption Key This field is applicable when you select an Encryption Algorithm. Enter the encryption key, which depends on the encryption algorithm.DES - type a unique key 16 hexadecimal characters long3 DES - type a unique key 48 hexadecimal characters longAES - type a unique key 32, 48 or 64 hexadecimal characters longAuthentication Algorithm Select which hash algorithm to use to authenticate packet data. Choices are MD 5 , SH A1 . SH A is generally considered stronger than MD5 , but it is also slower.Table 92 IPSec VPN: AddLABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 19 VPNVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 21519.3 Technical ReferenceThis section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this section.19.3.1 IPSec ArchitectureThe overall IPSec architecture is shown as follows.Figure 122 IPSec ArchitectureIPSec AlgorithmsThe ESP (Encapsulating Security Payload) Protocol (RFC 2406) and AH (Authentication Header) protocol (RFC 2402) describe the packet formats and the default standards for packet structure (including implementation algorithms).Authentication Key Enter the authentication key, which depends on the authentication algorithm.MD5 - type a unique key 32 hexadecimal characters longSH A1 - type a unique key 40 hexadecimal characters longSPI Type a unique SPI (Security Parameter Index) in hexadecimal characters.The SPI is used to identify the Device during authentication.The Device and remote IPSec router must use the same SPI.Apply Click Apply to save your changes.Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.Table 92 IPSec VPN: AddLABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 19 VPNVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide216The Encryption Algorithm describes the use of encryption techniques such as DES (Data Encryption Standard) and Triple DES algorithms.The Authentication Algorithms, HMAC-MD5 (RFC 2403) and HMAC-SHA-1 (RFC 2404, provide an authentication mechanism for the AH and ESP protocols. Key ManagementKey management allows you to determine whether to use IKE (ISAKMP) or manual key configuration in order to set up a VPN.19.3.2 EncapsulationThe two modes of operation for IPSec VPNs are Tr a n spo rt mode and Tunnel mode. At the time of writing, the Device supports Tunnel mode only.Figure 123 Transport and Tunnel Mode IPSec EncapsulationTransport ModeTr a n sp or t mode is used to protect upper layer protocols and only affects the data in the IP packet. In Tr a n sp or t mode, the IP packet contains the security protocol (AH or ESP) located after the original IP header and options, but before any upper layer protocols contained in the packet (such as TCP and UDP). With ESP, protection is applied only to the upper layer protocols contained in the packet. The IP header information and options are not used in the authentication process. Therefore, the originating IP address cannot be verified for integrity against the data. With the use of AH as the security protocol, protection is extended forward into the IP header to verify the integrity of the entire packet by use of portions of the original IP header in the hashing process.Tunnel Mode Tu n n e l mode encapsulates the entire IP packet to transmit it securely. A Tunne l mode is required for gateway services to provide access to internal systems. Tunne l mode is fundamentally an IP tunnel with authentication and encryption. This is the most common mode of operation. Tunne l mode is required for gateway to gateway and host to gateway communications. Tunnel mode communications have two sets of IP headers:•Out side he a de r: The outside IP header contains the destination IP address of the VPN gateway.
Chapter 19 VPNVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 217•I nside hea de r : The inside IP header contains the destination IP address of the final system behind the VPN gateway. The security protocol appears after the outer IP header and before the inside IP header. 19.3.3 IKE PhasesThere are two phases to every IKE (Internet Key Exchange) negotiation – phase 1 (Authentication) and phase 2 (Key Exchange). A phase 1 exchange establishes an IKE SA and the second one uses that SA to negotiate SAs for IPSec.Figure 124 Two Phases to Set Up the IPSec SAIn phase 1 you must:• Choose a negotiation mode.• Authenticate the connection by entering a pre-shared key.• Choose an encryption algorithm.• Choose an authentication algorithm.• Choose a Diffie-Hellman public-key cryptography key group.• Set the IKE SA lifetime. This field allows you to determine how long an IKE SA should stay up before it times out. An IKE SA times out when the IKE SA lifetime period expires. If an IKE SA times out when an IPSec SA is already established, the IPSec SA stays connected.In phase 2 you must:• Choose an encryption algorithm.• Choose an authentication algorithm• Choose a Diffie-Hellman public-key cryptography key group.• Set the IPSec SA lifetime. This field allows you to determine how long the IPSec SA should stay up before it times out. The Device automatically renegotiates the IPSec SA if there is traffic when the IPSec SA lifetime period expires. If an IPSec SA times out, then the IPSec router must renegotiate the SA the next time someone attempts to send traffic.
Chapter 19 VPNVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide21819.3.4 Negotiation ModeThe phase 1 N e got iat ion M ode you select determines how the Security Association (SA) will be established for each connection through IKE negotiations. •Ma in Mode ensures the highest level of security when the communicating parties are negotiating authentication (phase 1). It uses 6 messages in three round trips: SA negotiation, Diffie-Hellman exchange and an exchange of nonces (a nonce is a random number). This mode features identity protection (your identity is not revealed in the negotiation). •Aggre ssive M ode is quicker than Ma in M ode because it eliminates several steps when the communicating parties are negotiating authentication (phase 1). However the trade-off is that faster speed limits its negotiating power and it also does not provide identity protection. It is useful in remote access situations where the address of the initiator is not know by the responder and both parties want to use pre-shared key authentication.19.3.5 IPSec and NATRead this section if you are running IPSec on a host computer behind the Device.NAT is incompatible with the AH protocol in both Transpor t and Tu n n e l mode. An IPSec VPN using the AH protocol digitally signs the outbound packet, both data payload and headers, with a hash value appended to the packet. When using AH protocol, packet contents (the data payload) are not encrypted.A NAT device in between the IPSec endpoints will rewrite either the source or destination address with one of its own choosing. The VPN device at the receiving end will verify the integrity of the incoming packet by computing its own hash value, and complain that the hash value appended to the received packet doesn't match. The VPN device at the receiving end doesn't know about the NAT in the middle, so it assumes that the data has been maliciously altered.IPSec using ESP in Tu n ne l mode encapsulates the entire original packet (including headers) in a new IP packet. The new IP packet's source address is the outbound address of the sending VPN gateway, and its destination address is the inbound address of the VPN device at the receiving end. When using ESP protocol with authentication, the packet contents (in this case, the entire original packet) are encrypted. The encrypted contents, but not the new headers, are signed with a hash value appended to the packet.Tu n n e l mode ESP with authentication is compatible with NAT because integrity checks are performed over the combination of the "original header plus original payload," which is unchanged by a NAT device. Tr a n sp or t mode ESP with authentication is not compatible with NAT.Table 93 VPN and NATSECURITY PROTOCOL MODE NATAH Transport NAH Tunnel NESP Transport NESP Tunnel Y
Chapter 19 VPNVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 21919.3.6 VPN, NAT, and NAT TraversalNAT is incompatible with the AH protocol in both transport and tunnel mode. An IPSec VPN using the AH protocol digitally signs the outbound packet, both data payload and headers, with a hash value appended to the packet, but a NAT device between the IPSec endpoints rewrites the source or destination address. As a result, the VPN device at the receiving end finds a mismatch between the hash value and the data and assumes that the data has been maliciously altered.NAT is not normally compatible with ESP in transport mode either, but the Device’s NAT Tra ve r sa l feature provides a way to handle this. NAT traversal allows you to set up an IKE SA when there are NAT routers between the two IPSec routers.Figure 125 NAT Router Between IPSec RoutersNormally you cannot set up an IKE SA with a NAT router between the two IPSec routers because the NAT router changes the header of the IPSec packet. NAT traversal solves the problem by adding a UDP port 500 header to the IPSec packet. The NAT router forwards the IPSec packet with the UDP port 500 header unchanged. In the above figure, when IPSec router A tries to establish an IKE SA, IPSec router B checks the UDP port 500 header, and IPSec routers A and B build the IKE SA.For NAT traversal to work, you must:• Use ESP security protocol (in either transport or tunnel mode).•Use IKE keying mode.• Enable NAT traversal on both IPSec endpoints.• Set the NAT router to forward UDP port 500 to IPSec router A.Finally, NAT is compatible with ESP in tunnel mode because integrity checks are performed over the combination of the "original header plus original payload," which is unchanged by a NAT device. The compatibility of AH and ESP with NAT in tunnel and transport modes is summarized in the following table.Y* - This is supported in the Device if you enable NAT traversal.19.3.7 Pre-Shared KeyA pre-shared key identifies a communicating party during a phase 1 IKE negotiation (see Section 19.3.3 on page 217 for more on IKE phases). It is called “pre-shared” because you have to share it with another party before you can communicate with them over a secure connection.Table 94 VPN and NATSECURITY PROTOCOL MODE NATAH Transport NAH Tunnel NESP Transport Y*ESP Tunnel YAB
Chapter 19 VPNVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide22019.3.8 Diffie-Hellman (DH) Key GroupsDiffie-Hellman (DH) is a public-key cryptography protocol that allows two parties to establish a shared secret over an unsecured communications channel. Diffie-Hellman is used within IKE SA setup to establish session keys. Upon completion of the Diffie-Hellman exchange, the two peers have a shared secret, but the IKE SA is not authenticated. For authentication, use pre-shared keys.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 221CHAPTER 20Log20.1 OverviewThe web configurator allows you to choose which categories of events and/or alerts to have the Device log and then display the logs or have the Device send them to an administrator (as e-mail) or to a syslog server. 20.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter•Use the Syste m Log screen to see the system logs (Section 20.2 on page 222).•Use the Securit y Log screen to see the security-related logs for the categories that you select (Section 20.3 on page 223).20.1.2 What You Need To KnowThe following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter.Alerts and LogsAn alert is a type of log that warrants more serious attention. They include system errors, attacks (access control) and attempted access to blocked web sites. Some categories such as Syst em Er r ors consist of both logs and alerts. You may differentiate them by their color in the Vie w Log screen. Alerts display in red and logs display in black.Syslog Overview The syslog protocol allows devices to send event notification messages across an IP network to syslog servers that collect the event messages. A syslog-enabled device can generate a syslog message and send it to a syslog server.Syslog is defined in RFC 3164. The RFC defines the packet format, content and system log related information of syslog messages. Each syslog message has a facility and severity level. The syslog facility identifies a file in the syslog server. Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for details. The following table describes the syslog severity levels. Table 95 Syslog Severity LevelsCODE SEVERITY0 Emergency: The system is unusable.1 Alert: Action must be taken immediately.2 Critical: The system condition is critical.3 Error: There is an error condition on the system.4 Warning: There is a warning condition on the system.
Chapter 20 LogVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide22220.2 The System Log Screen Use the Syst em Log screen to see the system logs. Click Syst em Mon it or > Log to open the Syst e m Log screen. Figure 126 System Monitor > Log > System LogThe following table describes the fields in this screen. 5 Notice: There is a normal but significant condition on the system.6 Informational: The syslog contains an informational message.7 Debug: The message is intended for debug-level purposes.Table 95 Syslog Severity LevelsCODE SEVERITYTable 96 System Monitor > Log > System LogLABEL DESCRIPTIONLevel Select a severity level from the drop-down list box. This filters search results according to the severity level you have selected. When you select a severity, the Device searches through all logs of that severity or higher. Category Select the type of logs to display.Clear Log Click this to delete all the logs. Refresh Click this to renew the log screen. Export Log Click this to export the selected log(s).Email Log Now Click this to send the log file(s) to the E-mail address you specify in the M a in t e na n ce > Logs Set t in g screen.System Log#This field is a sequential value and is not associated with a specific entry.Time This field displays the time the log was recorded. Facility The log facility allows you to send logs to different files in the syslog server. Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for more details.Level This field displays the severity level of the logs that the device is to send to this syslog server.Messages This field states the reason for the log.
Chapter 20 LogVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 22320.3 The Security Log ScreenUse the Secur it y Log screen to see the security-related logs for the categories that you select. Click Syst e m M onit or > Log > Se curit y Log to open the following screen. Figure 127 System Monitor > Log > Security LogThe following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 97 System Monitor > Log > Security LogLABEL DESCRIPTIONLevel Select a severity level from the drop-down list box. This filters search results according to the severity level you have selected. When you select a severity, the Device searches through all logs of that severity or higher. Category Select the type of logs to display.Clear Log Click this to delete all the logs. Refresh Click this to renew the log screen. Export Log Click this to export the selected log(s).Email Log Now Click this to send the log file(s) to the E-mail address you specify in the M a in t e na n ce > Logs Set t in g screen.#This field is a sequential value and is not associated with a specific entry.Time This field displays the time the log was recorded. Facility The log facility allows you to send logs to different files in the syslog server. Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for more details.Level This field displays the severity level of the logs that the device is to send to this syslog server.Messages This field states the reason for the log.
Chapter 20 LogVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide224
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 225CHAPTER 21Traffic Status21.1 OverviewUse the Tr a ffic St at us screens to look at network traffic status and statistics of the WAN and LAN interfaces. 21.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter•Use the W AN screen to view the WAN traffic statistics (Section 21.2 on page 225).•Use the LAN screen to view the LAN traffic statistics (Section 21.3 on page 227).21.2 The WAN Status Screen Click Syst e m M onit or > Tr affic St a t us to open the W AN screen. The figure in this screen shows the number of bytes received and sent on the Device.Figure 128 System Monitor > Traffic Status > WAN
Chapter 21 Traffic StatusVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide226The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 98 System Monitor > Traffic Status > WANLABEL DESCRIPTIONConnected Interface This shows the name of the WAN interface that is currently connected.Packets Sent Data This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface.Error This indicates the number of frames with errors transmitted on this interface.Drop This indicates the number of outgoing packets dropped on this interface.Packets ReceivedData This indicates the number of received packets on this interface.Error This indicates the number of frames with errors received on this interface.Drop This indicates the number of received packets dropped on this interface.more...hide moreClick m ore ... to show more information. Click hid e m or e to hide them.Disabled InterfaceThis shows the name of the WAN interface that is currently disconnected.Packets Sent Data This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface.Error This indicates the number of frames with errors transmitted on this interface.Drop This indicates the number of outgoing packets dropped on this interface.Packets ReceivedData This indicates the number of received packets on this interface.Error This indicates the number of frames with errors received on this interface.Drop This indicates the number of received packets dropped on this interface.
Chapter 21 Traffic StatusVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 22721.3 The LAN Status ScreenClick Syst e m M onit or > Tra ffic St a t us > LAN to open the following screen. The figure in this screen shows the interface that is currently connected on the Device.Figure 129 System Monitor > Traffic Status > LANThe following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 99 System Monitor > Traffic Status > LANLABEL DESCRIPTIONRefresh Interval Select how often you want the Device to update this screen.Interface This shows the LAN or WLAN interface. Bytes Sent This indicates the number of bytes transmitted on this interface.Bytes Received This indicates the number of bytes received on this interface.more...hide more Click m or e ... to show more information. Click hide m or e to hide them.Interface This shows the LAN or WLAN interface. Sent (Packets)Data This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface.Error This indicates the number of frames with errors transmitted on this interface.Drop This indicates the number of outgoing packets dropped on this interface.Received (Packets)Data This indicates the number of received packets on this interface.Error This indicates the number of frames with errors received on this interface.Drop This indicates the number of received packets dropped on this interface.
Chapter 21 Traffic StatusVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide22821.4 The NAT Status ScreenClick Syst e m M onit or > Tra ffic St a t us > N AT to open the following screen. The figure in this screen shows the NAT statistics for hosts that are currently connected on the Device.Figure 130 System Monitor > Traffic Status > NAT The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 100 System Monitor > Traffic Status > NATLABEL DESCRIPTIONRefresh Interval Select how often you want the Device to update this screen.Device Name This displays the name of the connected host.IP Address This displays the IP address of the connected host.MAC Address This displays the MAC address of the connected host.No. of Open SessionThis displays the number of open NAT sessions for the connected host.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 229CHAPTER 22ARP Table22.1 OverviewAddress Resolution Protocol (ARP) is a protocol for mapping an Internet Protocol address (IP address) to a physical machine address, also known as a Media Access Control or MAC address, on the local area network. An IP (version 4) address is 32 bits long. In an Ethernet LAN, MAC addresses are 48 bits long. The ARP Table maintains an association between each MAC address and its corresponding IP address. 22.1.1 How ARP WorksWhen an incoming packet destined for a host device on a local area network arrives at the device, the device's ARP program looks in the ARP Table and, if it finds the address, sends it to the device.If no entry is found for the IP address, ARP broadcasts the request to all the devices on the LAN. The device fills in its own MAC and IP address in the sender address fields, and puts the known IP address of the target in the target IP address field. In addition, the device puts all ones in the target MA C f i el d ( F F.F F.F F. F F. FF. F F i s t he E th er n et br o ad ca s t address). The replying device (which is either the IP address of the device being sought or the router that knows the way) replaces the broadcast address with the target's MAC address, swaps the sender and target pairs, and unicasts the answer directly back to the requesting machine. ARP updates the ARP Table for future reference and then sends the packet to the MAC address that replied. 22.2 ARP Table ScreenUse the ARP table to view IP-to-MAC address mapping(s). To open this screen, click Syst em M on it or > ARP Table.Figure 131 System Monitor > ARP TableThe following table describes the labels in this screen.Table 101 System Monitor > ARP TableLABEL DESCRIPTION# This is the ARP table entry number.IP Address This is the learned IP address of a device connected to a port.
Chapter 22 ARP TableVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide230MAC Address This is the MAC address of the device with the listed IP address.Device This is the type of interface used by the device. You can click on the device type to go to its configuration screen.Table 101 System Monitor > ARP Table (continued)LABEL DESCRIPTION
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 231CHAPTER 23Routing Table23.1 OverviewRouting is based on the destination address only and the Device takes the shortest path to forward a packet.23.2 The Routing Table ScreenClick Syst e m M onit or > Rou t ing Ta ble to open the following screen.Figure 132 System Monitor > Routing TableThe following table describes the labels in this screen.Table 102 System Monitor > Routing TableLABEL DESCRIPTIONDestination This indicates the destination IP address of this route.Gateway This indicates the IP address of the gateway that helps forward this route’s traffic.Subnet Mask This indicates the destination subnet mask of this route.Flag This indicates the route status.U- Up: The route is up.!- Re j e ct : The route is blocked and will force a route lookup to fail.G- Ga tew a y: The route uses a gateway to forward traffic. H - H ost : The target of the route is a host.R- Re in st a t e : The route is reinstated for dynamic routing.D- D yn a m ic ( redir ect ) : The route is dynamically installed by a routing daemon or redirect.M- M odified ( redirect ) : The route is modified from a routing daemon or redirect.Metric The metric represents the "cost of transmission". A router determines the best route for transmission by choosing a path with the lowest "cost". The smaller the number, the lower the "cost".
Chapter 23 Routing TableVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide232Service This indicates the name of the service used to forward the route.Interface This indicates the name of the interface through which the route is forwarded.br0 indicates the LAN interface.ptm 0 indicates the WAN interface using IPoE or in bridge mode.ppp0 indicates the WAN interface using PPPoE.Table 102 System Monitor > Routing Table (continued)LABEL DESCRIPTION
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 233CHAPTER 24IGMP Status24.1 OverviewUse the I GM P St a t us screens to look at IGMP group status and traffic statistics. 24.2 The IGMP Group Status ScreenUse this screen to look at the current list of multicast groups the Device has joined and which ports have joined it. To open this screen, click Syst e m M onit or > I GM P Gr ou p St a t us.Figure 133 System Monitor > IGMP Group StatusThe following table describes the labels in this screen.Table 103 System Monitor > IGMP Group StatusLABEL DESCRIPTIONInterface This field displays the name of an interface on the Device that belongs to an IGMP multicast group. Multicast Group This field displays the name of the IGMP multicast group to which the interface belongs. Filter Mode I N CLUD E means that only the IP addresses in the Sour ce List get to receive the multicast group’s traffic.EXCLUD E means that the IP addresses in the Sou rce List are not allowed to receive the multicast group’s traffic but other IP addresses can.Source List This is the list of IP addresses that are allowed or not allowed to receive the multicast group’s traffic depending on the filter mode.
Chapter 24 IGMP StatusVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide234
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 235CHAPTER 25xDSL Statistics25.1 The xDSL Statistics ScreenUse this screen to view detailed DSL statistics. Click Syst e m M onit or > x D SL St a t istics to open the following screen.Figure 134 System Monitor > xDSL Statistics
Chapter 25 xDSL StatisticsVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide236The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 104 Status > xDSL StatisticsLABEL DESCRIPTIONRefresh Interval Select the time interval for refreshing statistics.Line Select which DSL line’s statistics you want to display.xDSL Training StatusThis displays the current state of setting up the DSL connection.Mode This displays the ITU standard used for this connection.Traffic Type This displays the type of traffic the DSL port is sending and receiving. I n a ct iv e displays if the DSL port is not currently sending or receiving traffic.Link Uptime This displays how long the port has been running (or connected) since the last time it was started.xDSL Port DetailsUpstream These are the statistics for the traffic direction going out from the port to the service provider.Downstream These are the statistics for the traffic direction coming into the port from the service provider. Line Rate These are the data transfer rates at which the port is sending and receiving data.Actual Net Data RateThese are the rates at which the port is sending and receiving the payload data without transport layer protocol headers and traffic.Trellis Coding This displays whether or not the port is using Trellis coding for traffic it is sending and receiving. Trellis coding helps to reduce the noise in ADSL transmissions. Trellis may reduce throughput but it makes the connection more stable.SNR Margin This is the upstream and downstream Signal-to-Noise Ratio margin (in dB). A DMT sub-carrier’s SNR is the ratio between the received signal power and the received noise power. The signal-to-noise ratio margin is the maximum that the received noise power could increase with the system still being able to meet its transmission targets.Actual Delay This is the upstream and downstream interleave delay. It is the wait (in milliseconds) that determines the size of a single block of data to be interleaved (assembled) and then transmitted. Interleave delay is used when transmission error correction (Reed- Solomon) is necessary due to a less than ideal telephone line. The bigger the delay, the bigger the data block size, allowing better error correction to be performed. Transmit Power This is the upstream and downstream far end actual aggregate transmit power (in dBm).Upstream is how much power the port is using to transmit to the service provider. Downstream is how much port the service provider is using to transmit to the port.Receive Power Upstream is how much power the service provider is receiving from the port. Downstream is how much power the port is receiving from the service provider.Actual INP Sudden spikes in the line’s level of external noise (impulse noise) can cause errors and result in lost packets. This could especially impact the quality of multimedia traffic such as voice or video. Impulse noise protection (INP) provides a buffer to allow for correction of errors caused by error correction to deal with this. The number of DMT (Discrete Multi-Tone) symbols shows the level of impulse noise protection for the upstream and downstream traffic. A higher symbol value provides higher error correction capability, but it causes overhead and higher delay which may increase error rates in received multimedia data.Total Attenuation This is the upstream and downstream line attenuation, measured in decibels (dB). This attenuation is the difference between the power transmitted at the near-end and the power received at the far-end. Attenuation is affected by the channel characteristics (wire gauge, quality, condition and length of the physical line).Attainable Net Data RateThese are the highest theoretically possible transfer rates at which the port could send and receive payload data without transport layer protocol headers and traffic.xDSL Counters
Chapter 25 xDSL StatisticsVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 237Downstream These are the statistics for the traffic direction coming into the port from the service provider. Upstream These are the statistics for the traffic direction going out from the port to the service provider.FEC This is the number of Far End Corrected blocks.CRC This is the number of Cyclic Redundancy Checks. ES This is the number of Errored Seconds meaning the number of seconds containing at least one errored block or at least one defect.SES This is the number of Severely Errored Seconds meaning the number of seconds containing 30% or more errored blocks or at least one defect. This is a subset of ES.UAS This is the number of UnAvailable Seconds.LOS This is the number of Loss Of Signal seconds.LOF This is the number of Loss Of Frame seconds.LOM This is the number of Loss of Margin seconds.Table 104 Status > xDSL Statistics (continued)LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 25 xDSL StatisticsVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide238
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 239CHAPTER 263G Statistics26.1 OverviewUse the 3 G St a t ist ics screens to look at 3G Internet connection status. 26.2 The 3G Statistics ScreenTo open this screen, click Syst em Mon it or > 3 G St at ist ics.Figure 135 System Monitor > 3G Statistics The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 105 System Monitor > 3G StatisticsLABEL DESCRIPTIONRefresh IntervalSelect how often you want the Device to update this screen. Select N o Refresh to stop refreshing.3G Status This field displays the status of the 3G Internet connection. This field can display:GSM - Global System for Mobile Communications, 2GGPRS - General Packet Radio Service, 2.5GED GE - Enhanced Data rates for GSM Evolution, 2.75GW CDMA - Wideband Code Division Multiple Access, 3GHSDPA - High-Speed Downlink Packet Access, 3.5GHSUPA - High-Speed Uplink Packet Access, 3.75GHSPA - HSDPA+HSUPA, 3.75GService ProviderThis field displays the name of the service provider.Signal Strength This field displays the strength of the signal in dBm.
Chapter 26 3G StatisticsVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide240Connection UptimeThis field displays the time the connection has been up.3G Card ManufacturerThis field displays the manufacturer of the 3G card.3G Card Model This field displays the model name of the 3G card.3G Card F/W VersionThis field displays the firmware version of the 3G card.SIM Card IMSI The International Mobile Subscriber Identity or IMSI is a unique identification number associated with all cellular networks. This number is provisioned in the SIM card.Table 105 System Monitor > 3G Statistics (continued)LABEL DESCRIPTION
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 241CHAPTER 27User Account27.1 Overview In the Use r s Account screen, you can change the password of the user account that you used to log in the Device. 27.2 The User Account ScreenClick M a in t e na n ce > User Accoun t to open the following screen.Figure 136 Maintenance > User AccountThe following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 106 Maintenance > User AccountLABEL DESCRIPTIONUser Name This field displays the name of the account that you used to log in the system. Old Password Type the default password or the existing password you use to access the system in this field.New Password Type your new system password (up to 256 characters). Note that as you type a password, the screen displays a (*) for each character you type. After you change the password, use the new password to access the Device.Retype to confirmType the new password again for confirmation.Apply Click Apply to save your changes.Cancel Click Can cel to restore your previously saved settings.
Chapter 27 User AccountVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide242
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 243CHAPTER 28Remote Management28.1 OverviewRemote Management allows you to manage your Device from a remote location through the following interfaces:•LAN•WAN•Trust DomainNote: The Device is managed using the Web Configurator.28.2 The Remote MGMT ScreenUse this screen to configure through which interface(s) users can use which service(s) to manage the Device.Click M a in t e n a nce > Rem ot e M GMT to open the following screen. Figure 137 Maintenance > Remote MGMT
Chapter 28 Remote ManagementVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide244The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 107 Maintenance > Remote MGMT LABEL DESCRIPTIONTrust DomainStatus This field displays whether the Trust Domain is active or not.IP Address Enter the Trust Domain IP address.Services This is the service you may use to access the Device.LAN/WLAN Select the Ena ble check box for the corresponding services that you want to allow access to the Device from the LAN/WLAN.WAN Select the Ena ble check box for the corresponding services that you want to allow access to the Device from the WAN.Trust Domain Select the Ena ble check box for the corresponding services that you want to allow access to the Device from the Trust Domain.Port You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management.CertificateHTTPS CertificateSelect a certificate the HTTPS server (the Device) uses to authenticate itself to the HTTPS client. You must have certificates already configured in the Ce r t if ica t e s screen.Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Device.Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 245CHAPTER 29TR-069 Client29.1 OverviewThis chapter explains how to configure the Device’s TR-069 auto-configuration settings.29.2 The TR-069 Client ScreenTR-069 defines how Customer Premise Equipment (CPE), for example your Device, can be managed over the WAN by an Auto Configuration Server (ACS). TR-069 is based on sending Remote Procedure Calls (RPCs) between an ACS and a client device. RPCs are sent in Extensible Markup Language (XML) format over HTTP or HTTPS. An administrator can use an ACS to remotely set up the Device, modify settings, perform firmware upgrades as well as monitor and diagnose the Device. You have to enable the device to be managed by the ACS and specify the ACS IP address or domain name and username and password.Click M a in t e n a nce > TR- 0 6 9 Clie n t to open the following screen. Use this screen to configure your Device to be managed by an ACS. Figure 138 Maintenance > TR-069 Client
Chapter 29 TR-069 ClientVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide246The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 108 Maintenance > TR-069 ClientLABEL DESCRIPTIONInform Select Ena ble for the Device to send periodic inform via TR-069 on the WAN. Otherwise, select D isable.Inform Interval Enter the time interval (in seconds) at which the Device sends information to the auto-configuration server.ACS URL Enter the URL or IP address of the auto-configuration server.ACS User Name Enter the TR-069 user name for authentication with the auto-configuration server.ACS Password Enter the TR-069 password for authentication with the auto-configuration server.WAN Interface used by TR-069 clientSelect a WAN interface through which the TR-069 traffic passes.If you select An y_ W AN , you should also select the pre-configured WAN connection(s).Display SOAP messages on serial consoleSelect Enable to show the SOAP messages on the console.Connection Request AuthenticationSelect this option to enable authentication when there is a connection request from the ACS.Connection Request User NameEnter the connection request user name.When the ACS makes a connection request to the Device, this user name is used to authenticate the ACS.Connection Request PasswordEnter the connection request password.When the ACS makes a connection request to the Device, this password is used to authenticate the ACS.Connection Request URLThis shows the connection request URL.The ACS can use this URL to make a connection request to the Device.Local certificate used by TR-069 clientYou can choose a local certificate used by TR-069 client. The local certificate should be imported in the Se cu rit y > Ce rt ificat e s > Local Cer t ificat es screen. Apply Click Apply to save your changes.Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 247CHAPTER 30TR-06430.1 OverviewThis chapter explains how to configure the Device’s TR-064 auto-configuration settings.30.2 The TR-064 ScreenTR-064 is a LAN-Side DSL CPE Configuration protocol defined by the DSL Forum. TR-064 is built on top of UPnP. It allows the users to use a TR-064 compliant CPE management application on their computers from the LAN to discover the CPE and configure user-specific parameters, such as the username and password.Click M a in t e na n ce > TR- 0 6 4 to open the following screen. Figure 139 Maintenance > TR-064 The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 109 Maintenance > TR-064LABEL DESCRIPTIONState Select Enable to activate management via TR-064 on the LAN.Apply Click Apply to save your changes.Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Chapter 30 TR-064VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide248
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 249CHAPTER 31Time Settings31.1 OverviewThis chapter shows you how to configure system related settings, such as system time, password, name, the domain name and the inactivity timeout interval. 31.2 The Time Screen To change your Device’s time and date, click Maint enance > Tim e. The screen appears as shown. Use this screen to configure the Device’s time based on your local time zone.Figure 140 Maintenance > Time Setting
Chapter 31 Time SettingsVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide250The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 110 Maintenance > Time SettingLABEL DESCRIPTIONCurrent Date/TimeCurrent Time This field displays the time of your Device.Each time you reload this page, the Device synchronizes the time with the time server.Current Date This field displays the date of your Device. Each time you reload this page, the Device synchronizes the date with the time server.NTP Time ServerFirst ~ Fifth NTP time server Select an NTP time server from the drop-down list box. Otherwise, select Ot h e r and enter the IP address or URL (up to 29 extended ASCII characters in length) of your time server. Select N on e if you don’t want to configure the time server.Check with your ISP/network administrator if you are unsure of this information.Time ZoneTime zone offset Choose the time zone of your location. This will set the time difference between your time zone and Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). Daylight Saving Daylight Saving Time is a period from late spring to early fall when many countries set their clocks ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime light in the evening.State Select Ena ble if you use Daylight Saving Time.Start rule: Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts if you enabled Daylight Saving. You can select a specific date in a particular month or a specific day of a specific week in a particular month. The Tim e field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of examples:Daylight Saving Time starts in most parts of the United States on the second Sunday of March. Each time zone in the United States starts using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M. local time. So in the United States, set the day to Second, Sunda y, the month to M a rch and the time to 2 in the Hour field.Daylight Saving Time starts in the European Union on the last Sunday of March. All of the time zones in the European Union start using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment (1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would set the day to La st , Su nday and the month to Ma r ch. The time you select in the o'clock field depends on your time zone. In Germany for instance, you would select 2 in the Hou r field because Germany's time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1). End rule Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time ends if you enabled Daylight Saving. You can select a specific date in a particular month or a specific day of a specific week in a particular month. The Tim e field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of examples:Daylight Saving Time ends in the United States on the first Sunday of November. Each time zone in the United States stops using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M. local time. So in the United States you would set the day to Fir st , Sunda y, the month to Nove m be r and the time to 2 in the Hour field. Daylight Saving Time ends in the European Union on the last Sunday of October. All of the time zones in the European Union stop using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment (1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would set the day to Last, Sun da y, and the month to Oct ob e r. The time you select in the o' clock field depends on your time zone. In Germany for instance, you would select 2 in the Hou r field because Germany's time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1).
Chapter 31 Time SettingsVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 251Apply Click Apply to save your changes.Cancel Click Can cel to exit this screen without saving.Table 110 Maintenance > Time Setting (continued)LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 31 Time SettingsVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide252
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 253CHAPTER 32E-mail Notification32.1 Overview A mail server is an application or a computer that runs such an application to receive, forward and deliver e-mail messages.To have the Device send reports, logs or notifications via e-mail, you must specify an e-mail server and the e-mail addresses of the sender and receiver.32.2 The Email Notification ScreenClick Ma int enance > Em a il N ot ificat ion to open the Em ail N ot ificat ion screen. Use this screen to view, remove and add mail server information on the Device.Figure 141 Maintenance > Email Notification The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 111 Maintenance > Email NotificationLABEL DESCRIPTIONAdd New Email Click this button to create a new entry.Mail Server AddressThis field displays the server name or the IP address of the mail server.Username This field displays the user name of the sender’s mail account.Password This field displays the password of the sender’s mail account.Email Address This field displays the e-mail address that you want to be in the from/sender line of the e-mail that the Device sends. Delete Click this button to delete the selected entries.
Chapter 32 E-mail NotificationVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide25432.2.1 Email Notification Edit Click the Add button in the Em a il N ot ificat ion screen. Use this screen to configure the required information for sending e-mail via a mail server. Figure 142 Email Notification > Add The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 112 Email Notification > AddLABEL DESCRIPTIONMail Server AddressEnter the server name or the IP address of the mail server for the e-mail address specified in the Accou nt Em ail Add ress field. If this field is left blank, reports, logs or notifications will not be sent via e-mail.Authentication Username Enter the user name (up to 32 characters). This is usually the user name of a mail account you specified in the Accou nt Em ail Addr e ss field.Authentication Password Enter the password associated with the user name above.Account Email AddressEnter the e-mail address that you want to be in the from/sender line of the e-mail notification that the Device sends. If you activate SSL/TLS authentication, the e-mail address must be able to be authenticated by the mail server as well.Apply Click this button to save your changes and return to the previous screen.Cancel Click this button to begin configuring this screen afresh.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 255CHAPTER 33Logs Setting33.1 Overview You can configure where the Device sends logs and which logs and/or immediate alerts the Device records in the Logs Se t t ing screen.
Chapter 33 Logs SettingVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide25633.2 The Log Settings ScreenTo change your Device’s log settings, click Maint e nance > Logs Se tt in g. The screen appears as shown.Figure 143 Maintenance > Logs SettingThe following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 113 Maintenance > Logs SettingLABEL DESCRIPTIONSyslog SettingSyslog Logging The Device sends a log to an external syslog server. Select Ena ble to enable syslog logging. Mode Select the syslog destination from the drop-down list box. If you select Re m o t e, the log(s) will be sent to a remote syslog server. If you select Local File , the log(s) will be saved in a local file. If you want to send the log(s) to a remote syslog server and save it in a local file, select Loca l File a n d Re m ot e.
Chapter 33 Logs SettingVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 25733.2.1 Example E-mail LogAn "End of Log" message displays for each mail in which a complete log has been sent. The following is an example of a log sent by e-mail.• You may edit the subject title.• The date format here is Day-Month-Year.• The date format here is Month-Day-Year. The time format is Hour-Minute-Second.Syslog Server Enter the server name or IP address of the syslog server that will log the selected categories of logs. UDP Port Enter the port number used by the syslog server.E-mail Log SettingsMail Server Enter the server name or the IP address of the mail server for the e-mail addresses specified below. If this field is left blank, logs and alert messages will not be sent via E-mail. System Log Mail SubjectType a title that you want to be in the subject line of the system log e-mail message that the Device sends. Security Log Mail SubjectType a title that you want to be in the subject line of the security log e-mail message that the Device sends. Send Log to The Device sends logs to the e-mail address specified in this field. If this field is left blank, the Device does not send logs via E-mail. Send Alarm to Alerts are real-time notifications that are sent as soon as an event, such as a DoS attack, system error, or forbidden web access attempt occurs. Enter the E-mail address where the alert messages will be sent. Alerts include system errors, attacks and attempted access to blocked web sites. If this field is left blank, alert messages will not be sent via E-mail. Alarm Interval Specify how often the alarm should be updated.Allowed Capacity Before Email Set what percent of the Device’s log storage space can be filled before the Device sends a log e-mail. Clear log after sending mailSelect this to delete all the logs after the Device sends an E-mail of the logs.Active Log and AlertSystem Log Select the categories of system logs that you want to record.Security Log Select the categories of security logs that you want to record.Send immediate alert Select log categories for which you want the Device to send E-mail alerts immediately. Apply Click Apply to save your changes.Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.Table 113 Maintenance > Logs Setting (continued)LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 33 Logs SettingVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide258•"End of Log" message shows that a complete log has been sent.Figure 144 E-mail Log ExampleSubject: Firewall Alert From Date: Fri, 07 Apr 2000 10:05:42 From: user@zyxel.com To: user@zyxel.com 1|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.1 To:192.168.1.255 |default policy |forward | 09:54:03 |UDP src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,00> | 2|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.131 To:192.168.1.255 |default policy |forward | 09:54:17 |UDP src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,00> | 3|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.6 To:10.10.10.10 |match |forward | 09:54:19 |UDP src port:03516 dest port:00053 |<1,01> | ……………………………..{snip}…………………………………..……………………………..{snip}…………………………………..126|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.1 To:192.168.1.255 |match |forward | 10:05:00 |UDP src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,02> | 127|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.131 To:192.168.1.255 |match |forward | 10:05:17 |UDP src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,02> | 128|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.1 To:192.168.1.255 |match |forward | 10:05:30 |UDP src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,02> | End of Firewall Log
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 259CHAPTER 34Firmware Upgrade34.1 OverviewThis chapter explains how to upload new firmware to your Device. You can download new firmware releases from your nearest ZyXEL FTP site (or www.zyxel.com) to use to upgrade your device’s performance.Only use firmware for your device’s specific model. Refer to the label on the bottom of your Device.34.2 The Firmware ScreenClick M a in t e n a nce > Fir m w a r e Upgr a de to open the following screen. The upload process uses HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) and may take up to two minutes. After a successful upload, the system will reboot. Do NOT turn off the Device while firmware upload is in progress!Figure 145 Maintenance > Firmware UpgradeThe following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 114 Maintenance > Firmware UpgradeLABEL DESCRIPTIONCurrent Firmware VersionThis is the present Firmware version and the date created. File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Brow se ... to find it.Browse... Click this to find the .bin file you want to upload. Remember that you must decompress compressed (.zip) files before you can upload them. Upload Click this to begin the upload process. This process may take up to two minutes.
Chapter 34 Firmware UpgradeVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide260After you see the firmware updating screen, wait two minutes before logging into the Device again. Figure 146 Firmware UploadingThe Device automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect. In some operating systems, you may see the following icon on your desktop.Figure 147 Network Temporarily DisconnectedAfter two minutes, log in again and check your new firmware version in the St a t u s screen.If the upload was not successful, the following screen will appear. Click OK to go back to the Firm w are Upgrade screen.Figure 148 Error Message
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 261CHAPTER 35Configuration35.1 OverviewThe Configurat ion screen allows you to backup and restore device configurations. You can also reset your device settings back to the factory default.35.2 The Configuration Screen Click M a in t e na n ce > Con figu r a t ion. Information related to factory defaults, backup configuration, and restoring configuration appears in this screen, as shown next.Figure 149 Maintenance > ConfigurationBackup Configuration Backup Configuration allows you to back up (save) the Device’s current configuration to a file on your computer. Once your Device is configured and functioning properly, it is highly recommended that you back up your configuration file before making configuration changes. The backup configuration file will be useful in case you need to return to your previous settings. Click Ba ck u p to save the Device’s current configuration to your computer.
Chapter 35 ConfigurationVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide262Restore Configuration Restore Configuration allows you to upload a new or previously saved configuration file from your computer to your Device.Do not turn off the Device while configuration file upload is in progress.After the Device configuration has been restored successfully, the login screen appears. Login again to restart the Device. The Device automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect. In some operating systems, you may see the following icon on your desktop.Figure 150 Network Temporarily DisconnectedIf you uploaded the default configuration file you may need to change the IP address of your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default device IP address (192.168.1.1). If the upload was not successful, the following screen will appear. Click OK to go back to the Con fig ur a t ion screen. Figure 151 Configuration Upload ErrorTable 115 Restore ConfigurationLABEL DESCRIPTIONFile Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Brow se ... to find it.Browse... Click this to find the file you want to upload. Remember that you must decompress compressed (.ZIP) files before you can upload them. Upload Click this to begin the upload process.
Chapter 35 ConfigurationVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 263Reset to Factory Defaults Click the Re se t button to clear all user-entered configuration information and return the Device to its factory defaults. The following warning screen appears.Figure 152 Reset Warning MessageFigure 153 Reset In Process MessageYou can also press the RESET button on the rear panel to reset the factory defaults of your Device. Refer to Section 1.6 on page 20 for more information on the RESET button.35.3 The Reboot Screen System restart allows you to reboot the Device remotely without turning the power off. You may need to do this if the Device hangs, for example.Click M a in t e n a nce > Reboot. Click Re boot to have the Device reboot. This does not affect the Device's configuration. Figure 154 Maintenance > Reboot
Chapter 35 ConfigurationVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide264
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 265CHAPTER 36Diagnostic36.1 OverviewThe D ia gn ost ic screens display information to help you identify problems with the Device.The route between a CO VDSL switch and one of its CPE may go through switches owned by independent organizations. A connectivity fault point generally takes time to discover and impacts subscriber’s network access. In order to eliminate the management and maintenance efforts, IEEE 802.1ag is a Connectivity Fault Management (CFM) specification which allows network administrators to identify and manage connection faults. Through discovery and verification of the path, CFM can detect, analyze and isolate connectivity faults in bridged LANs.36.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter•The Ping & Tra ce Rout e & N sLook up screen lets you ping an IP address or trace the route packets take to a host (Section 36.3 on page 266).•The 8 0 2 .1 a g screen lets you perform CFM actions (Section 36.5 on page 268).•The OAM Ping screen lets you send an ATM OAM (Operation, Administration and Maintenance) packet to verify the connectivity of a specific PVC. (Section 36.5 on page 268).36.2 What You Need to KnowThe following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter.How CFM Works A Maintenance Association (MA) defines a VLAN and associated Maintenance End Point (MEP) ports on the device under a Maintenance Domain (MD) level. An MEP port has the ability to send Connectivity Check Messages (CCMs) and get other MEP ports information from neighbor devices’ CCMs within an MA. CFM provides two tests to discover connectivity faults. • Loopback test - checks if the MEP port receives its Loop Back Response (LBR) from its target after it sends the Loop Back Message (LBM). If no response is received, there might be a connectivity fault between them. • Link trace test - provides additional connectivity fault analysis to get more information on where the fault is. If an MEP port does not respond to the source MEP, this may indicate a fault. Administrators can take further action to check and resume services from the fault according to the line connectivity status report.
Chapter 36 DiagnosticVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide26636.3 Ping & TraceRoute & NsLookup Use this screen to ping, traceroute, or nslookup an IP address. Click Ma int ena n ce > Dia gnost ic > Ping & Tr a ceRout e & N sLook up to open the screen shown next.Figure 155 Maintenance > Diagnostic > Ping & TraceRoute & NsLookup The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 116 Maintenance > Diagnostic > Ping & TraceRoute & NsLookupLABEL DESCRIPTIONURL or IP AddressType the IP address of a computer that you want to perform ping, traceroute, or nslookup in order to test a connection.Ping Click this to ping the IP address that you entered.TraceRoute Click this button to perform the traceroute function. This determines the path a packet takes to the specified computer.Nslookup Click this button to perform a DNS lookup on the IP address of a computer you enter.
Chapter 36 DiagnosticVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 26736.4 802.1agClick M a in t e n a nce > D ia gnost ic > 8 .2 .1 a g to open the following screen. Use this screen to perform CFM actions. Figure 156 Maintenance > Diagnostic > 802.1ag The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 117 Maintenance > Diagnostic > 802.1agLABEL DESCRIPTION802.1ag Connectivity Fault Management Maintenance Domain (MD) LevelSelect a level (0-7) under which you want to create an MA.Destination MAC AddressEnter the target device’s MAC address to which the Device performs a CFM loopback test.802.1Q VLAN IDType a VLAN ID (0-4095) for this MA.VDSL Traffic TypeThis shows whether the VDSL traffic is activated.Loopback Message (LBM)This shows how many Loop Back Messages (LBMs) are sent and if there is any inorder or outorder Loop Back Response (LBR) received from a remote MEP.Linktrace Message (LTM)This shows the destination MAC address in the Link Trace Response (LTR).Set MD Level Click this button to configure the MD (Maintenance Domain) level.Send Loopback Click this button to have the selected MEP send the LBM (Loop Back Message) to a specified remote end point.Send Linktrace Click this button to have the selected MEP send the LTMs (Link Trace Messages) to a specified remote end point.
Chapter 36 DiagnosticVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide26836.5 OAM Ping Click Ma int ena nce > D ia gnost ic > OAM Pin g to open the screen shown next. Use this screen to perform an OAM (Operation, Administration and Maintenance) F4 or F5 loopback test on a PVC. The Device sends an OAM F4 or F5 packet to the DSLAM or ATM switch and then returns it to the Device. The test result then displays in the text box. ATM sets up virtual circuits over which end systems communicate. The terminology for virtual circuits is as follows:Figure 157 Virtual Circuit TopologyThink of a virtual path as a cable that contains a bundle of wires. The cable connects two points and wires within the cable provide individual circuits between the two points. In an ATM cell header, a VPI (Virtual Path Identifier) identifies a link formed by a virtual path; a VCI (Virtual Channel Identifier) identifies a channel within a virtual path. A series of virtual paths make up a virtual circuit.F4 cells operate at the virtual path (VP) level, while F5 cells operate at the virtual channel (VC) level. F4 cells use the same VPI as the user data cells on VP connections, but use different predefined VCI values. F5 cells use the same VPI and VCI as the user data cells on the VC connections, and are distinguished from data cells by a predefined Payload Type Identifier (PTI) in the cell header. Both F4 flows and F5 flows are bidirectional and have two types. • segment F4 flows (VCI=3)• end-to-end F4 flows (VCI=4)• segment F5 flows (PTI=100)• end-to-end F5 flows (PTI=101)OAM F4 or F5 tests are used to check virtual path or virtual channel availability between two DSL devices. Segment flows are terminated at the connecting point which terminates a VP or VC segment. End-to-end flows are terminated at the end point of a VP or VC connection, where an ATM link is terminated. Segment loopback tests allow you to verify integrity of a PVC to the nearest neighboring ATM device. End-to-end loopback tests allow you to verify integrity of an end-to-end PVC.Note: The DSLAM to which the Device is connected must also support ATM F4 and/or F5 to use this test.• Virtual Channel (VC) Logical connections between ATM devices• Virtual Path (VP) A bundle of virtual channels• Virtual Circuits A series of virtual paths between circuit end points
Chapter 36 DiagnosticVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 269Note: This screen is available only when you configure an ATM layer-2 interface.Figure 158 Maintenance > Diagnostic > OAM PingThe following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 118 Maintenance > Diagnostic > OAM PingLABEL DESCRIPTIONSelect a PVC on which you want to perform the loopback test.F4 segment Press this to perform an OAM F4 segment loopback test.F4 end-end Press this to perform an OAM F4 end-to-end loopback test.F5 segment Press this to perform an OAM F5 segment loopback test.F5 end-end Press this to perform an OAM F5 end-to-end loopback test.
Chapter 36 DiagnosticVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide270
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 271CHAPTER 37TroubleshootingThis chapter offers some suggestions to solve problems you might encounter. The potential problems are divided into the following categories. •Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs•Device Access and Login•Internet Access•Wireless Internet Access•USB Device Connection•UPnP37.1 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDsThe Device does not turn on. None of the LEDs turn on.1Make sure the Device is turned on. 2Make sure you are using the power adaptor or cord included with the Device.3Make sure the power adaptor or cord is connected to the Device and plugged in to an appropriate power source. Make sure the power source is turned on.4Turn the Device off and on.5If the problem continues, contact the vendor.One of the LEDs does not behave as expected.1Make sure you understand the normal behavior of the LED. See Section 1.5 on page 20.2Check the hardware connections.3Inspect your cables for damage. Contact the vendor to replace any damaged cables.4Turn the Device off and on.
Chapter 37 TroubleshootingVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide2725If the problem continues, contact the vendor.37.2 Device Access and LoginI forgot the IP address for the Device.1The default LAN IP address is 192.168.1.1.2If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, you might get the IP address of the Device by looking up the IP address of the default gateway for your computer. To do this in most Windows computers, click Sta r t > Run, enter cm d, and then enter ipcon fig. The IP address of the De fa u lt Ga t ew a y might be the IP address of the Device (it depends on the network), so enter this IP address in your Internet browser.3If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 1.6 on page 20.I forgot the password.1The default admin password is 1 2 3 4 .2If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 1.6 on page 20.I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator.1Make sure you are using the correct IP address.• The default IP address is 192.168.1.1.• If you changed the IP address (Section 7.2 on page 103), use the new IP address.• If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, see the troubleshooting suggestions for I forgot the IP address for the Device.2Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See Section 1.5 on page 20.3Make sure your Internet browser does not block pop-up windows and has JavaScripts and Java enabled. 4If it is possible to log in from another interface, check the service control settings for HTTP and HTTPS (Maint e n a nce > Rem ot e MGM T).
Chapter 37 TroubleshootingVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 2735Reset the device to its factory defaults, and try to access the Device with the default IP address. See Section 1.6 on page 20.6If the problem continues, contact the network administrator or vendor, or try one of the advanced suggestions.Adv a n ce d Su gge st ions• Make sure you have logged out of any earlier management sessions using the same user account even if they were through a different interface or using a different browser.• Try to access the Device using another service, such as Telnet. If you can access the Device, check the remote management settings and firewall rules to find out why the Device does not respond to HTTP. I can see the Login screen, but I cannot log in to the Device.1Make sure you have entered the password correctly. The default admin password is 1 2 3 4 . The field is case-sensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on. 2You cannot log in to the web configurator while someone is using Telnet to access the Device. Log out of the Device in the other session, or ask the person who is logged in to log out. 3Turn the Device off and on. 4If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 37.1 on page 271.I cannot Telnet to the Device.See the troubleshooting suggestions for I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator. Ignore the suggestions about your browser.I cannot use FTP to upload / download the configuration file. / I cannot use FTP to upload new firmware.See the troubleshooting suggestions for I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator. Ignore the suggestions about your browser.
Chapter 37 TroubleshootingVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide27437.3 Internet AccessI cannot access the Internet.1Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See the Quick St a r t Guide and Section 1.5 on page 20.2Make sure you entered your ISP account information correctly in the N e t w ork Se t t in g > Broadba n d screen. These fields are case-sensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on. 3If you are trying to access the Internet wirelessly, make sure that you enabled the wireless LAN in the Device and your wireless client and that the wireless settings in the wireless client are the same as the settings in the Device.4Disconnect all the cables from your device and reconnect them. 5If the problem continues, contact your ISP. I cannot access the Internet through a DSL connection.1Make sure you have the D SL W AN port connected to a telephone jack (or the DSL or modem jack on a splitter if you have one).2Make sure you configured a proper DSL WAN interface (Net w ork Set t ing > Br oadba n d screen) with the Internet account information provided by your ISP and that it is enabled.3Check that the LAN interface you are connected to is in the same interface group as the DSL connection (N e t w or k Set t ing > I nt e rfa ce Gr ou p).4If you set up a WAN connection using bridging service, make sure you turn off the DHCP feature in the LAN screen to have the clients get WAN IP addresses directly from your ISP’s DHCP server.I cannot connect to the Internet using a second DSL connection.ADSL and VDSL connections cannot work at the same time. You can only use one type of DSL connection, either ADSL or VDSL connection at one time.I cannot access the Internet anymore. I had access to the Internet (with the Device), but my Internet connection is not available anymore.1Your session with the Device may have expired. Try logging into the Device again.
Chapter 37 TroubleshootingVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 2752Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See the Quick St a r t Guide and Section 1.5 on page 20.3Turn the Device off and on.4If the problem continues, contact your ISP. 37.4 Wireless Internet AccessWhat factors may cause intermittent or unstabled wireless connection? How can I solve this problem?The following factors may cause interference:• Obstacles: walls, ceilings, furniture, and so on.• Building Materials: metal doors, aluminum studs.• Electrical devices: microwaves, monitors, electric motors, cordless phones, and other wireless devices.To optimize the speed and quality of your wireless connection, you can:• Move your wireless device closer to the AP if the signal strength is low.• Reduce wireless interference that may be caused by other wireless networks or surrounding wireless electronics such as cordless phones.• Place the AP where there are minimum obstacles (such as walls and ceilings) between the AP and the wireless client. • Reduce the number of wireless clients connecting to the same AP simultaneously, or add additional APs if necessary.• Try closing some programs that use the Internet, especially peer-to-peer applications. If the wireless client is sending or receiving a lot of information, it may have too many programs open that use the Internet. What is a Server Set ID (SSID)?An SSID is a name that uniquely identifies a wireless network. The AP and all the clients within a wireless network must use the same SSID.
Chapter 37 TroubleshootingVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide27637.5 USB Device Connection The Device fails to detect my USB device.1Disconnect the USB device.2Reboot the Device.3If you are connecting a USB hard drive that comes with an external power supply, make sure it is connected to an appropriate power source that is on. 4Re-connect your USB device to the Device.37.6 UPnPWhen using UPnP and the Device reboots, my computer cannot detect UPnP and refresh My N et w or k Place s > Local N e t w ork .1Disconnect the Ethernet cable from the Device’s LAN port or from your computer.2Re-connect the Ethernet cable. The Local Area Con nection icon for UPnP disappears in the screen.Restart your computer.I cannot open special applications such as white board, file transfer and video when I use the MSN messenger.1Wait more than three minutes.2Restart the applications.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 277APPENDIX ACustomer SupportIn the event of problems that cannot be solved by using this manual, you should contact your vendor. If you cannot contact your vendor, then contact a ZyXEL office for the region in which you bought the device. Regional websites are listed below (see also http://www.zyxel.com/about_zyxel/zyxel_worldwide.shtml). Please have the following information ready when you contact an office.Required Information• Product model and serial number.• Warranty Information.• Date that you received your device.• Brief description of the problem and the steps you took to solve it.Corporate Headquarters (Worldwide)Taiwan• ZyXEL Communications Corporation• http://www.zyxel.comAsiaChina• ZyXEL Communications (Shanghai) Corp.ZyXEL Communications (Beijing) Corp.ZyXEL Communications (Tianjin) Corp.• http://www.zyxel.cnIndia• ZyXEL Technology India Pvt Ltd• http://www.zyxel.inKazakhstan•ZyXEL Kazakhstan• http://www.zyxel.kz
Appendix A Customer SupportVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide278Korea• ZyXEL Korea Corp.• http://www.zyxel.krMalaysia• ZyXEL Malaysia Sdn Bhd.• http://www.zyxel.com.myPakistan• ZyXEL Pakistan (Pvt.) Ltd.• http://www.zyxel.com.pkPhilippines• ZyXEL Philippines• http://www.zyxel.com.phSingapore• ZyXEL Singapore Pte Ltd.• http://www.zyxel.com.sgTaiwan• ZyXEL Communications Corporation• http://www.zyxel.comThailand• ZyXEL Thailand Co., Ltd • http://www.zyxel.co.thVietnam• ZyXEL Communications Corporation-Vietnam Office• http://www.zyxel.com/vn/viEuropeAustria• ZyXEL Deutschland GmbH • http://www.zyxel.deBelarus•ZyXEL BY • http://www.zyxel.by
Appendix A Customer SupportVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 279Belgium• ZyXEL Communications B.V. • http://www.zyxel.com/be/nl/Bulgaria•ZyXEL България• http://www.zyxel.com/bg/bg/ Czech• ZyXEL Communications Czech s.r.o • http://www.zyxel.czDenmark• ZyXEL Communications A/S• http://www.zyxel.dkEstonia•ZyXEL Estonia• http://www.zyxel.com/ee/et/Finland• ZyXEL Communications• http://www.zyxel.fiFrance•ZyXEL France• http://www.zyxel.frGermany• ZyXEL Deutschland GmbH • http://www.zyxel.deHungary• ZyXEL Hungary & SEE • http://www.zyxel.huLatvia•ZyXEL Latvia• http://www.zyxel.com/lv/lv/homepage.shtml
Appendix A Customer SupportVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide280Lithuania• ZyXEL Lithuania• http://www.zyxel.com/lt/lt/homepage.shtmlNetherlands•ZyXEL Benelux• http://www.zyxel.nlNorway• ZyXEL Communications• http://www.zyxel.noPoland• ZyXEL Communications Poland• http://www.zyxel.plRomania•ZyXEL Romania• http://www.zyxel.com/ro/roRussia• ZyXEL Russia • http://www.zyxel.ruSlovakia• ZyXEL Communications Czech s.r.o. organizacna zlozka• http://www.zyxel.skSpain•ZyXEL Spain• http://www.zyxel.esSweden• ZyXEL Communications • http://www.zyxel.seSwitzerland•Studerus AG• http://www.zyxel.ch/
Appendix A Customer SupportVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 281Turkey•ZyXEL Turkey A.S.• http://www.zyxel.com.trUK• ZyXEL Communications UK Ltd.• http://www.zyxel.co.ukUkraine•ZyXEL Ukraine• http://www.ua.zyxel.comLatin AmericaArgentina• ZyXEL Communication Corporation• http://www.zyxel.com/ec/es/Ecuador• ZyXEL Communication Corporation• http://www.zyxel.com/ec/es/Middle EastEgypt• ZyXEL Communication Corporation• http://www.zyxel.com/homepage.shtmlMiddle East• ZyXEL Communication Corporation• http://www.zyxel.com/homepage.shtmlNorth AmericaUSA• ZyXEL Communications, Inc. - North America Headquarters• http://www.us.zyxel.com/
Appendix A Customer SupportVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide282OceaniaAustralia• ZyXEL Communications Corporation• http://www.zyxel.com/au/en/AfricaSouth Africa• Nology (Pty) Ltd.• http://www.zyxel.co.za
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 283APPENDIX BLegal InformationCopyrightCopyright © 2014 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation.The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, translated into any language, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, photocopying, manual, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation.Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation. All rights reserved.DisclaimerZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products, or software described herein. Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others. ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without notice. This publication is subject to change without notice.Your use of the Device is subject to the terms and conditions of any related service providers. TrademarksZyNOS (ZyXEL Network Operating System) is a registered trademark of ZyXEL Communications, Inc. Other trademarks mentioned in this publication are used for identification purposes only and may be properties of their respective owners. Trademarks mentioned in this publication are used for identification purposes only and may be properties of their respective owners. Certifications Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Interference Statement The device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:• This device may not cause harmful interference.• This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operations.This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This device generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.If this device does cause harmful interference to radio/television reception, which can be determined by turning the device off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:1Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.2Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver.3Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.4Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.FCC Caution: Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.FCC Radiation Exposure Statement • This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. • IEEE 802.11b, 802.11g or 802.11n (20MHz) operation of this product in the U.S.A. is firmware-limited to channels 1 through 11. IEEE 802.11n (40MHz) operation of this product in the U.S.A. is firmware-limited to channels 3 through 9. • IEEE 802.11b or 802.11g operation of this product in the U.S.A. is firmware-limited to channels 1 through 11. • To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. IC Radiation Exposure Statement This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. End users must follow the specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance.Notices Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.This device is designed for the WLAN 2.4 GHz networks throughout the EC region and Switzerland, with restrictions in France.Ce produit est conçu pour les bandes de fréquences 2,4 GHz conformément à la législation Européenne. En France métropolitaine, suivant les décisions n°03-908 et 03-909 de l’ARCEP, la puissance d’émission ne devra pas dépasser 10 mW (10 dB) dans le cadre d’une installation WiFi en extérieur pour les fréquences comprises entre 2454 MHz et 2483,5 MHz.
Appendix B Legal InformationVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide284Viewing Certifications Go to http://www.zyxel.com to view this product’s documentation and certifications.ZyXEL Limited Warranty ZyXEL warrants to the original end user (purchaser) that this product is free from any defects in material or workmanship for a specific period (the Warranty Period) from the date of purchase. The Warranty Period varies by region. Check with your vendor and/or the authorized ZyXEL local distributor for details about the Warranty Period of this product. During the warranty period, and upon proof of purchase, should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and/or materials, ZyXEL will, at its discretion, repair or replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor, and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating condition. Any replacement will consist of a new or re-manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or higher value, and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL. This warranty shall not apply if the product has been modified, misused, tampered with, damaged by an act of God, or subjected to abnormal working conditions.NoteRepair or replacement, as provided under this warranty, is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser. This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, express or implied, including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose. ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser.To obtain the services of this warranty, contact your vendor. You may also refer to the warranty policy for the region in which you bought the device at http://www.zyxel.com/web/support_warranty_info.php.RegistrationRegister your product online to receive e-mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www.zyxel.com for global products, or at www.us.zyxel.com for North American products.Open Source Licenses This product contains in part some free software distributed under GPL license terms and/or GPL like licenses. Open source licenses are provided with the firmware package. You can download the latest firmware at www.zyxel.com. If you cannot find it there, contact your vendor or ZyXEL Technical Support at support@zyxel.com.tw. To obtain the source code covered under those Licenses, please contact your vendor or ZyXEL Technical Support at support@zyxel.com.tw. Regulatory Information European UnionThe following information applies if you use the product within the European Union. Declaration of Conformity with Regard to EU Directive 1999/5/EC (R&TTE Directive)Compliance Information for Wireless Products Relevant to the EU and Other Countries Following the EU Directive 1999/5/EC (R&TTE Directive) [Czech] ZyXEL tímto prohlašuje, že tento zařízení je ve shodě se základními požadavky a dalšími příslušnými ustanoveními směrnice 1999/5/EC.[Danish] Undertegnede ZyXEL erklærer herved, at følgende udstyr udstyr overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.[German] Hiermit erklärt ZyXEL, dass sich das Gerät Ausstattung in Übereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EU befindet.[Estonian] Käesolevaga kinnitab ZyXEL seadme seadmed vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ põhinõuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele sätetele.[English] Hereby, ZyXEL declares that this equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.[Spanish] Por medio de la presente ZyXEL declara que el equipo cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.[Greek] Ε Η ΑΑ ZyXEL ∆ΗΩΕ  επισός ΦΩΕΑ   Ω∆Ε ΑΑΗΕ Α  Ε ΧΕΕ ∆ΑΑΕ Η ∆ΗΓΑ 1999/5/ΕC.[French] Par la présente ZyXEL déclare que l'appareil équipements est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/EC.[Italian] Con la presente ZyXEL dichiara che questo attrezzatura è conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.[Latvian] Ar šo ZyXEL deklarē, ka iekārtas atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/EK būtiskajām prasībām un citiem ar to saistītajiem noteikumiem.[Lithuanian] Šiuo ZyXEL deklaruoja, kad šis įranga atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos nuostatas.[Dutch] Hierbij verklaart ZyXEL dat het toestel uitrusting in overeenstemming is met de essentiële eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EC.[Maltese] Hawnhekk, ZyXEL, jiddikjara li dan tagħmir jikkonforma mal-ħtiġijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti oħrajn relevanti li hemm fid-Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC.[Hungarian] Alulírott, ZyXEL nyilatkozom, hogy a berendezés megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ követelményeknek és az 1999/5/EK irányelv egyéb elõírásainak.
Appendix B Legal InformationVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 285National RestrictionsThis product may be used in all EU countries (and other countries following the EU directive 1999/5/EC) without any limitation except for the countries mentioned below:Ce produit peut être utilisé dans tous les pays de l’UE (et dans tous les pays ayant transposés la directive 1999/5/CE) sans aucune limitation, excepté pour les pays mentionnés ci-dessous:Questo prodotto è utilizzabile in tutte i paesi EU (ed in tutti gli altri paesi che seguono le direttive EU 1999/5/EC) senza nessuna limitazione, eccetto per i paesii menzionati di seguito:Das Produkt kann in allen EU Staaten ohne Einschränkungen eingesetzt werden (sowie in anderen Staaten die der EU Direktive 1995/5/CE folgen) mit Außnahme der folgenden aufgeführten Staaten:In the majority of the EU and other European countries, the 2,4-GHz band has been made available for the use of wireless local area networks (LANs). Later in this document you will find an overview of countries inwhich additional restrictions or requirements or both are applicable.The requirements for any country may evolve. ZyXEL recommends that you check with the local authorities for the latest status of their national regulations for 2,4-GHz wireless LANs.The following countries have restrictions and/or requirements in addition to those given in the table labeled “Overview of Regulatory Requirem ents for Wireless LANs”:.BelgiumThe Belgian Institute for Postal Services and Telecommunications (BIPT) must be notified of any outdoor wireless link having a range exceeding 300 meters. Please check http://www.bipt.be for more details.Draadloze verbindingen voor buitengebruik en met een reikwijdte van meer dan 300 meter dienen aangemeld te worden bij het Belgisch Instituut voor postdiensten en telecommunicatie (BIPT). Zie http://www.bipt.be voor meer gegevens.Les liaisons sans fil pour une utilisation en extérieur d’une distance supérieure à 300 mètres doivent être notifiées à l’Institut Belge des services Postaux et des Télécommunications (IBPT). Visitez http://www.ibpt.be pour de plus amples détails.FranceFor 2.4 GHz, the output power is restricted to 10 mW EIRP when the product is used outdoors in the band 2454 - 2483.5 MHz. There are no restrictions when used indoors or in other parts of the 2.4 GHz band. Check http://www.arcep.fr/ for more details.Pour la bande 2.4 GHz, la puissance est limitée à 10 mW en p.i.r.e. pour les équipements utilisés en extérieur dans la bande 2454 - 2483.5 MHz. Il n'y a pas de restrictions pour des utilisations en intérieur ou dans d'autres parties de la bande 2.4 GHz. Consultez http://www.arcep.fr/ pour de plus amples détails.ItalyThis product meets the National Radio Interface and the requirements specified in the National Frequency Allocation Table for Italy. Unless this wireless LAN product is operating within the boundaries of the owner's property, its use requires a “general authorization.” Please check http://www.sviluppoeconomico.gov.it/ for more details.[Polish] Niniejszym ZyXEL oświadcza, że sprzęt jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostałymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.[Portuguese] ZyXEL declara que este equipamento está conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposições da Directiva 1999/5/EC.[Slovenian] ZyXEL izjavlja, da je ta oprema v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi določili direktive 1999/5/EC.[Slovak] ZyXEL týmto vyhlasuje, že zariadenia spĺňa základné požiadavky a všetky príslušné ustanovenia Smernice 1999/5/EC.[Finnish] ZyXEL vakuuttaa täten että laitteet tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sitä koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen.[Swedish] Härmed intygar ZyXEL att denna utrustning står I överensstämmelse med de väsentliga egenskapskrav och övriga relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EC.[Bulgarian] С я ZyXEL , ч        я       1999/5/C.[Icelandic] Hér með lýsir, ZyXEL því yfir að þessi búnaður er í samræmi við grunnkröfur og önnur viðeigandi ákvæði tilskipunar 1999/5/EC.[Norwegian] Erklærer herved ZyXEL at dette utstyret er I samsvar med de grunnleggende kravene og andre relevante bestemmelser I direktiv 1999/5/EF.[Romanian] Prin prezenta, ZyXEL declară că acest echipament este în conformitate cu cerinţele esenţiale şi alte prevederi relevante ale Directivei 1999/5/EC.R&TTE 1999/5/ECWLAN 2.4 – 2.4835 GHzIEEE 802.11 b/g/nLocation Frequency Range (GHz)Indoor (No restrictions) 2.4 – 2.4835Outdoor 2.4 – 2.4542.454 – 2.4835
Appendix B Legal InformationVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide286Questo prodotto è conforme alla specifiche di Interfaccia Radio Nazionali e rispetta il Piano Nazionale di ripartizione delle frequenze in Italia. Se non viene installato all 'interno del proprio fondo, l'utilizzo di prodotti Wireless LAN richiede una “Autorizzazione Generale”. Consultare http://www.sviluppoeconomico.gov.it/ per maggiori dettagli.LatviaThe outdoor usage of the 2.4 GHz band requires an authorization from the Electronic Communications Office. Please check http://www.esd.lv for more details.2.4 GHz frekvenèu joslas izmantoðanai ârpus telpâm nepiecieðama atïauja no Elektronisko sakaru direkcijas. Vairâk informâcijas: http://www.esd.lv.Notes:1. Although Norway, Switzerland and Liechtenstein are not EU member states, the EU Directive 1999/5/EC has also been implemented in those countries.2. The regulatory limits for maximum output power are specified in EIRP. The EIRP level (in dBm) of a device can be calculated by adding the gain of the antenna used(specified in dBi) to the output power available at the connector (specified in dBm).List of national codesSafety Warnings• Do NOT use this product near water, for example, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool.• Do NOT expose your device to dampness, dust or corrosive liquids.• Do NOT store things on the device.• Do NOT install, use, or service this device during a thunderstorm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.• Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device.• Do NOT open the device or unit. Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks. ONLY qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device. Please contact your vendor for further information. • Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports.• Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them.• Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling.• Use ONLY an appropriate power adaptor or cord for your device. Connect it to the right supply voltage (for example, 110V AC in North America or 230V AC in Europe).• Do NOT allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power adaptor or cord.• Do NOT use the device if the power adaptor or cord is damaged as it might cause electrocution.• If the power adaptor or cord is damaged, remove it from the device and the power source.• Do NOT attempt to repair the power adaptor or cord. Contact your local vendor to order a new one.• Do not use the device outside, and make sure all the connections are indoors. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. • Do NOT obstruct the device ventilation slots, as insufficient airflow may harm your device. • Use only No. 26 AWG (American Wire Gauge) or larger telecommunication line cord. • Antenna Warning! This device meets ETSI and FCC certification requirements when using the included antenna(s). Only use the included antenna(s). • If you wall mount your device, make sure that no electrical lines, gas or water pipes will be damaged. • This product is for indoor use only (utilisation intérieure exclusivement). • Do not use this product near water for example, near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool.• Avoid using a telephone (other than a cordless type) during an electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.• Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.COUNTRY ISO 3166 2 LETTER CODE COUNTRY ISO 3166 2 LETTER CODEAustria AT Malta MTBelgium BE Netherlands NLCyprus CY Poland PLCzech Republic CR Portugal PTDenmark DK Slovakia SKEstonia EE Slovenia SIFinland FI Spain ESFrance FR Sweden SEGermany DE United Kingdom GBGreece GR Iceland ISHungary HU Liechtenstein LIIreland IE Norway NOItaly IT Switzerland CHLatvia LV Bulgaria BGLithuania LT Romania ROLuxembourg LU Turkey TR
Appendix B Legal InformationVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 287Your product is marked with this symbol, which is known as the WEEE mark. WEEE stands for Waste Electronics and Electrical Equipment. It means that used electrical and electronic products should not be mixed with general waste. Used electrical and electronic equipment should be treated separately.
Appendix B Legal InformationVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide288
IndexVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 289IndexAACL rule 189ACS 245activationfirewalls 185media server 181SIP ALG 159SSID 76Address Resolution Protocol 229administrator password 24AH 215algorithms 215applicationsInternet access 18media server 180activation 181iTunes server 180applications, NAT 164ARP Table 229, 231authentication 88, 89RADIUS server 90Auto Configuration Server, see ACS 245Bbackupconfiguration 261Basic Service Set, see BSSblinking LEDs 20Broadband 39broadcast 62BSS 91example 91CCA 201Canonical Format Indicator See CFICCMs 265certificatefactory default 202certificates 201authentication 201CAcreating 203public key 201replacing 202storage space 202Certification Authority 201Certification Authority. see CAcertifications 283notices 283viewing 284CFI 61CFM 265CCMs 265link trace test 265loopback test 265MA 265MD 265MEP 265MIP 265channel, wireless LAN 88client list 107compatibility, WDS 82configurationbackup 261firewalls 185reset 263restoring 262static route 57, 127, 169Connectivity Check Messages, see CCMscontact information 277copyright 283CoS 145CoS technologies 132creating certificates 203CTS threshold 84, 88
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide290Indexcustomer support 277Ddata fragment threshold 84, 88DDoS 184default server address 158Denials of Service, see DoSDH 220DHCP 102, 121Differentiated Services, see DiffServ 145Diffie-Hellman key groups 220DiffServ 145marking rule 145digital IDs 201disclaimer 283DLNA 180DMZ 158DNS 102, 121DNS server address assignment 62documentationrelated 2Domain Name 164Domain Name System, see DNSDomain Name System. See DNS.DoS 184DS field 145DS, dee differentiated servicesDSCP 145dynamic DNS 167wildcard 168Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, see DHCPDYNDNS wildcard 168EECHO 164e-maillog example 257Encapsulation 58MER 58PPP over Ethernet 59encapsulation 40, 216RFC 1483 59encryption 90ESP 215Extended Service Set IDentification 68, 78FFCC interference statement 283File Sharing 178file sharing 19filtersMAC address 78, 89Finger 164firewalls 183add protocols 185configuration 185DDoS 184DoS 184LAND attack 184Ping of Death 184SYN attack 184firmware 259version 37forwarding ports 150fragmentation threshold 84, 88FTP 150, 164GGeneral wireless LAN screen 66GuideQuick Start 2HHTTP 164
IndexVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 291IIEEE 802.1Q 61IGA 162IGMP 62multicast group list 233version 62IKE phases 217ILA 162Inside Global Address, see IGAinside header 217Inside Local Address, see ILAinterface group 171Internetwizard setup 31Internet access 18wizard setup 31Internet Key Exchange 217Internet Protocol version 6 41Internet Service Provider, see ISPIP address 102, 122ping 266private 122WAN 40IP Address Assignment 61IP aliasNAT applications 164IPSecalgorithms 215architecture 215NAT 218IPSec VPN 209IPv6 41addressing 41, 62prefix 41, 63prefix delegation 42prefix length 41, 63ISP 40iTunes server 180LLAN 101and USB printer 181client list 107DHCP 102, 121DNS 102, 121IP address 102, 103, 122MAC address 107status 37subnet mask 102, 103, 122LAND attack 184LAN-Side DSL CPE Configuration 247LBR 265limitationswireless LAN 91WPS 98link trace 265Link Trace Message, see LTMLink Trace Response, see LTRlogin 23passwords 23, 24logs 221, 225, 233, 239, 255Loop Back Response, see LBRloopback 265LTM 265LTR 265MMA 265MAC address 79, 107filter 78, 89MAC authentication 78Mac filter 193Maintenance Association, see MAMaintenance Domain, see MDMaintenance End Point, see MEPmanaging the devicegood habits 17Maximum Burst Size (MBS) 60MBSSID 91MD 265media server 180activation 181iTunes server 180MEP 265MTU (Multi-Tenant Unit) 61
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide292Indexmulticast 62Multiple BSS, see MBSSIDmultiplexing 59LLC-based 59VC-based 59multiprotocol encapsulation 59NNAT 149, 151, 161, 162applications 164IP alias 164example 163global 162IGA 162ILA 162inside 162IPSec 218local 162outside 162port forwarding 150port number 164services 164SIP ALG 158activation 159traversal 219NAT example 165negotiation mode 218Network Address Translation, see NATNetwork Map 35network map 27NNTP 164Oother documentation 2outside header 216Ppasswords 23, 24PBC 93Peak Cell Rate (PCR) 60Per-Hop Behavior, see PHB 145PHB 145PIN, WPS 94example 95Ping of Death 184Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol 164POP3 164port forwarding 150ports 20PPP over Ethernet, see PPPoEPPPoE 40, 59Benefits 59PPTP 164preamble 85, 88preamble mode 92prefix delegation 42pre-shared key 219Printer Server 181printer sharingand LAN 181requirements 181private IP address 122product registration 284protocol 40push button 21Push Button Configuration, see PBCpush button, WPS 93QQoS 131, 145marking 132setup 131tagging 132versus CoS 132Quality of Service, see QoSQuick Start Guide 2RRADIUS server 90
IndexVMG1312-B10C User’s Guide 293registrationproduct 284related documentation 2remote managementTR-069 245Remote Procedure Calls, see RPCs 245reset 20, 263restart 263restoring configuration 262RFC 1058. See RIP.RFC 1389. See RIP.RFC 1483 59RFC 3164 221RIP 129router features 18Routing Information Protocol. See RIPRPPCs 245RTS threshold 84, 88Ssecuritywireless LAN 88Security Log 223Security Parameter Index, see SPIservice access control 243Service Set 68, 78Services 164setupfirewalls 185static route 57, 127, 169Single Rate Three Color Marker, see srTCMSIP ALG 158activation 159SMTP 164SNMP 164SNMP trap 164SPI 184srTCM 147SSID 89activation 76MBSSID 91static route 125, 129, 253configuration 57, 127, 169example 125static VLANstatus 35firmware version 37LAN 37WAN 37wireless LAN 37status indicators 20subnet mask 102, 122Sustained Cell Rate (SCR) 60SYN attack 184syslogprotocol 221severity levels 221systemfirmware 259version 37passwords 23, 24reset 20status 35LAN 37WAN 37wireless LAN 37time 249TTag Control Information See TCITag Protocol Identifier See TPIDTCIThe 40thresholdsdata fragment 84, 88RTS/CTS 84, 88time 249TPID 61TR-064 247TR-069 245ACS setup 245authentication 246trademarks 283traffic shaping 59transport mode 216trTCM 147
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide294Indextunnel mode 216Two Rate Three Color Marker, see trTCMUunicast 62Universal Plug and Play, see UPnPupgrading firmware 259UPnP 108cautions 103example 109installation 109NAT traversal 102USB features 19VVIDVirtual Circuit (VC) 59Virtual Local Area Network See VLANVLAN 61Introduction 61number of possible VIDspriority framestaticVLAN ID 61VLAN Identifier See VIDVLAN tag 61WWANstatus 37Wide Area Network, see WAN 39warranty 284note 284WDS 82, 92compatibility 82example 92web configurator 23login 23passwords 23, 24WEP 90WEP Encryption 70, 72, 73WEP encryption 70WEP key 70Wireless Distribution System, see WDSwireless LAN 65, 86authentication 88, 89BSS 91example 91channel 88encryption 90example 87fragmentation threshold 84, 88limitations 91MAC address filter 78, 89MBSSID 91preamble 85, 88RADIUS server 90RTS/CTS threshold 84, 88security 88SSID 89activation 76status 37WDS 82, 92compatibility 82example 92WEP 90WPA 90WPA-PSK 90WPS 93, 95example 96limitations 98PIN 94push button 21, 93wizard setupInternet 31WPA 90WPA-PSK 90WPS 93, 95example 96limitations 98PIN 94example 95push button 21, 93

Navigation menu